Home

1336 FORCE-5.13 -- September 1998

1. RIO Scanner DIP Switches U2 Channel A or U4 Channel B DIP Switches U3 Channel A or U5 Channel B SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Protocol RIO Scanner On On Baud Rate 57 6K Off Off 115 2K Off On 230 4K On Either Not Used On On Not Applicable na na na Scanner Yes On No off RIO Rack Allocation Quarter 4 Quarter3 Quarter2 Quarter 1 1 4 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On 1 4 Off Off Off Off Off On Off Off 1 4 Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off 1 4 Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off Off Off On Off On 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off On Off Off Off On 1 4 1 4 Off On Off Off Off Off Off On 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off On Off On Off Off 1 4 1 4 Off On Off Off Off On Off Off 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off Off Off Off 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off On Off On Off On 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off Off Off On Off On 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off Off Off On 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off On Off Off 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off On Off On 1 2 Off Off Off Off On Off On Off 1 2 Off Off On Off On Off Off Off 1 2 On Off On Off Off Off Off Off 1 2 1 2 On Off On Off On Off On Off 3 4 Off Off On On On On On On 3 4 On On On On On On On On FULL Not Applicable 3 4 1 4 On On On On On On Off On 1 4 3 4 Off On On On On On On On 1 2 1 4 On Off On Off Off
2. No Name Group Page Group 389 Analog Out3 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 SP Warn Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 46 390 Analog Out 4 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 454 Trend In1 9 Trend I O 6 46 391 SP Analog Sel 3 SCANport 1 0 6 31 455 Trl Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 46 392 An In 1 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 456 Trl Opnd Parm Y 9 Trend Setup 6 47 393 An In 1 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 457 Trl Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 47 394 An In 2 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 458 Trl Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 47 395 An In 2 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 459 Trl Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 47 396 An In 3 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 460 Trl Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 48 397 An In 3 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 461 Trl Select 9 Trend Setup 6 48 398 An In 4 Offset 6 Analog I O 6 32 462 Tri Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 48 399 An In 4 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 463 Trend Out 1 9 Trend I O 6 48 400 An Out 1 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 464 Trendin 2 9 Trend 1 0 6 49 401 An Out 1 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 465 Tr2 Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 49 402 An Out2 Offset 6 Analog I O 6 33 466 Tr2 Opnd ParmY 9 Trend Setup 6 49 403 An Out 2 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 467 Tr2 Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 49 404 An Out3 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 468 Tr2 Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 50 405 An Out 3 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 469 Tr2 Po
3. non functional Enums Bitl Portl Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 376 Flux Owner Parameter Number 376 Flux Owner Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Flux Owner displays which ports are presently Factory Default 0 issuing a valid Flux Enable command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications I O SCAN port Owners Enums Bit1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 377 Trim Owner Parameter Number 377 Trim Owner Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Trim Owner displays which portis presently issuing Factory Default 0 a Trim Enable command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners Enums Bit1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 378 Ramp Owner Parameter Number 378 Ramp Owner Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Ramp Owner displays which portis presently issuing Factory Default 0 a Ramp command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners Enums Bitl Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 379 Clear Fault Owner Parameter Number 379 Clr Fault Owner Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Clr Fault Owner displays wh
4. 3 SS OK Worldwide representation _ _ aima Argentina Australia e Austria Bahrain Belgium Bolivia Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada Chile China People s Republic of e Colombia Costa Rica Croatia e Cyprus Czech Republic e Denmark Dominican Republic e Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Finland France Germany Ghana Greece Guatemala Honduras Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Indonesia Iran e Ireland e Israel Italy e Jamaica Japan Jordan Korea e Kuwait e Lebanon Macau Malaysia e Malta Mexico Morocco The Netherlands New Zealand Nigeria e Norway Oman e Pakistan Panama Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Qatar e Romania Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovakia Slovenia South Africa Republic of e Spain e Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Trinidad Tunisia Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States Uruguay Venezuela Rockwell Automation Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 P N 74002 115 01 01 Supersedes February 1996 Copyright 1998 Rockwell International Corporation All rights reserved Printed in USA
5. 0c cece eee eee EE Memory Request noid eskwseeve ne enidwe uaedewn boo Save Recall Initialize oo cece eee een Link Read occ tee aa Link Parameter Read cc cece eect teens Continuous Parameter Link Read Scattered Parameter Link Read ce ec eeeaees MEK WIE deve nce merianae ete irae ace fear nc ach r A Link Parameter Write 2 ccc cece cee ees Continuous Parameter Link Write Scattered Parameter Link Write ccc een Parameter Link Clear ccc ccc eee teens User Text STING cptwitcetaduniseeduneninseorndyeaunad User Text String Read nuanua User Text String Write 26 3 warty hed aris ee hoe ap dk wots Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 RealTime Clock Data Read oo ccc ccc cece eee ees RealTime Clock Data Read 0 cece eee ees RealTime Clock DataWrite ccc cece eee Run Time Accumulator Data Read cece eee eae Run Time Accumulator Data Read 0 0c aus Clear Run Time Accumulator oo ccc cee eee ees TIME SQM 26s 5a o c0 oeeeas o6e bed ae eae aad alee was Reference Time Stamp Data Read cece eee es Reference Time Stamp Data Write 0000 Load Clock Info Reference Stamp 20000 Trend File saitais rioan aE eet t eee n eens Number of Trends Available ccc cece eee eee Maximum Trend Size Available cece eee Trend COMMON sisi ssavaxese award Reader d Pas near Trend SUS is ia nd ited eam ad ghee se Setup Data Ful
6. Message Operation The Clear Run Time Accumulator defines a value of 29950 in the BTW Word 2 can clear the accumulated run time stored in the drive This allows you to monitor an accumulated time based on a specific event Example This function was requested to clear the accumulated run time in the drive since the last scheduled maintenance downtime In this example the BTW requested a clear with a value of 29950 in word 2 The BTR response indicated a successful clear by returning a value of 2818 in word 20 of the BTR header message Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW BTR Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 51 Time Stamp The Reference Time Stamp Data Read message reads the reference Reference Time Stamp Data time stamp value from the drive Read PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 7 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2816 Message OK 29952 Message Error Message Length Header 3 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 2816 Word 2 Header Reference Number Word 3 Clock Time Seconds 10ths of MS Clock Time Hour inute Clock Time Date Day Time Clock Year Month Message Operation You can define the reference time stamp to monitor the time of a specific event This function allows this time to be read from th
7. Parameters included in Groups 7 and 8 depend on the selected communications Shaded parameters do not exist when DH is selected Inputs are variable and depend on rack size and whether block transfer is enabled Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 9 Name No Group No Group No Data In B2 317 3 SCANport I O 6 14 Trl Cont Trigger 460 9 Trends 6 48 Data In C1 318 3 SCANport I O 6 14 Trl Operator 457 9 Trends 6 47 Data In C2 319 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 Trl Opnd Parm X 455 9 Trends 6 46 Data In D1 320 3 SCANport I O 6 14 Trl Opnd Parm Y 456 9 Trends 6 47 Data In D2 321 3 SCANport I O 6 14 Trl Post Samples 459 9 Trends 6 47 Data Out Al 343 3 SCANport I O 6 21 Trl Sample Rate 458 9 Trends 6 47 Data Out A2 344 3 SCANport I O 6 21 Trl Select 461 9 Trends 6 48 Data Out B1 345 3 SCANport I O 6 21 Trl Status 462 9 Trends 6 48 Data Out B2 346 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 Tr2 Cont Trigger 470 9 Trends 6 50 Data Out C1 347 3 SCANport I O 6 21 Tr2 Operator 467 9 Trends 6 49 Data Out C2 348 3 SCANport I O 6 22 Tr2 Opnd Parm X 465 9 Trends 6 49 Data Out D1 349 3 SCANport 1 0 6 22 Tr2 Opnd Parm Y 466 9 Trends 6 49 Data Out D2 350 3 SCANport 0 6 22 Tr2PostSamples
8. Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 61 Trend Status Example continued In this example a Trend Status message was requested for Trend 2 The drive responded that Trend 2 is in the tripped trigger state Data Format 0 i j 1 l BTW rapie N20 10 4097 8192 EE BA BTR Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 62 Trend File The Setup Data Full function allows you to write the trend set up Setup Data Full information in a single message If the set up data write is successful it will auto start the trend PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 15 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Data Word 4 Data Word 5 Data Word 6 Data Word 7 Data Word 8 Data Word 9 Data Word 10 Data Word 11 Data Word 12 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value Message Length 15 PLC Decimal Value 28670 4098 Message OK 28670 Message Error Trend Number Trend Number Trend Status Trend Sample Size Post Samples Operator Data Sample Time Rate Mode Comparison A Value Comparison A Link Comparison B Value Data Comparison B Link Word 13 Data Sampling Input Parameter Word 14 Trend Output P arameter Data Word 15 Pu
9. f Tr4 Cont Trigger specifies the type of trend You can choose either 0 for one shot or 1 for continuous With a one shot trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend stops With a continuous trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend continues looking for the next occurrence of a true trigger condition Parameter Number 490 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 491 Trend 4 Select Tr4 Select Tr4 Select specifies the trend mode The states are as follows 0 Disable the trend 1 Enable the trend Parameter Number 491 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 2 Force a true trigger condition Enums_ 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Force Trig 492 Trend 4 Status Parameter Number 492 Tr4 Status Parameter Type Read Only Non Linkable Source Display Units Drive Units None Tr4 Status identifies which state the trend is Factory Default 1 currently in The following states are possible Minimum Value 1 1 Stopped Trending is not executing Werdau velue f nace ee File Group Diagnostics Trend I O 2 Running Trendin
10. ATTENTION If you initiate a command to start motor rotation command a start or jog and then disconnect the programming device the drive will not fault if you have the SCANport communications fault set to be ignored for that port Viewing the SCANport Fault Status If a fault occurs while using SCANport you can use parameters 442 and 443 to determine the port at which the fault was encountered Use parameter 442 SP Fault Sts to view the fault status and parameter 443 SP Warn Sts to view the warning status For either parameter you can use the following table to determine where the problem was encountered This bit Represents 1 SCANport device 1 2 SCANport device 2 3 SCANport device 3 4 SCANport device 4 5 SCANport device 5 Using the SCANport Image The SCANport image is a mechanism for transferring data between SCANport devices and the drive The SCANport image is used in transferring real time data in the same way as the PLC image is used The devices on SCANport allocate the SCANport image so multiple devices can use different parts of the image The image can be divided into a full 3 4 1 2 or 1 4 rack This allows a maximum of four devices to access the drive at the same time You can view the values in the SCANport image table by using parameters 314 through 321 for input and 343 through 350 for output SCANport Image Out Data In A1 Par 314 Data Out A1 Par 343 Data In A2 Par 315
11. Baud Rate 57 6K Off Off 115 2K Off On 230 4K On either RIO Rack Size 1 4 Off Off 12 Off On 3 4 On Off Full On On Not Last Last Last On Not Last Off Redundant Yes On No Off RIO Starting Group 0 Off Off 2 Off On 4 On Off 6 On On RIO Rack Address 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 R R ff Off off ff Off On ff Off On On Off ff On Off ff On On ff On On oO R R R R R 5 R R R R 5 R R R R Q O QO OOD OO R R R Ss 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 of off off off off On off On On Off On Off On On On On R R O R R R O R R O R R R O R R O OO Oo Cio Oo ol o OO gt R R R R O E O OQO OV Ou OO 1 OO Oo R O O O OS GOOO O GOG OGD OQ R R s oO RIO Rack Address Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 11 co oe jy c 4 4 c 4 E 4 m E 4 c 4 E g E 4 c lt lt 4 Z 4 c Sy c e 4 et g Bnjoo0ocacoc0c ec Ojo 0 9G 9G GG CO 0T9Coc CGC O0 O OoOo ooo Oooo Oojo oOo OOO OO i Sele s oc ck s cce Cc ck He C CR KH CCK KH CR HE CCK HR CJR HR CCH H Cc Onjoocccec GCC CO o CC CC Cee OoOo O00000 Ce OoOo Cc C CCG O oOjc0 GCC Oooo O DO wo zjete ttt coe cfc clet amp amp c ec Cl amp amp amp fc fc cf
12. Block Transfer Error Bit 14 An error has occurred during communications with the SCANport device or the BTW data table is invalid Block Transfer Write Available Bit 15 A block transfer write is in progress between the PLC controller and the PLC Communications Adapter Board and the data is being processed by the PLC Communications Adapter Board This bit is set when read data is available These bits are used in the PLC block transfer example program on the following pages The following figure shows the bit timing information for block transfer BTW BTW Request 13 pata Available Data at PLC Communications Adapter Board BTR Request BTR Complete Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 12 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Data Storage To use the block transfer instructions in the PLC program you need to reserve several words for data storage Some of these words are required for internal use by the block transfer function and some contain the block transfer message information In the PLC 5 the BTW and BTR blocks require the use of two sets of words The next two figures show the BTW and BTR blocks used for block transfer in the PLC 5 along with example information associated with these blocks A brief description of the information contained in these blocks specifically for the PLC 5 follows For more information on the PLC 5 and the PLC
13. Channel A Remote I O Input 7 ChA RIOA In 7 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 7 scanner mode ChA RIOX In 7 contains the eighth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3290 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 330 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 0 ChB RIOA In 0 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 0 scanner mode ChB RIOx In 0 contains the first word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3300 Rea
14. File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 357 Channel A Remote I O Output 6 Parameter Number _ 3570 ChA RIOA Out 6 adapter mode Bae ae ela C i isplay Units Drive Units one ChA B RIOA Out6 adapter mode with redundancy Factory Default None ChA RIOS Out 6 scanner mode Minimum Value Eo ChA RIOx Out 6 contains the seventh word or data Maximum Value ere Pride group to the PLC controller input image table The File Group Communicanons HO CIT data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 358 Channel A Remote I O Output 7 Parameter Number _ 3580 ChA RIOA Out 7 adapter mode ohare ee ve Uni eels ChA B RIOA Out7 adapter mode with redundancy mite la ere Sone ChA RIOS Out 7 scanner mode Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 ChA RIOx Out 7 contains the eighth word or data group t
15. This field Indicates The day of the week where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Day Saturday Year The number of the year 1990 is referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Month The month of the year where 1 is January and 12 is December The Date and Time are in hexadecimal format Example In this example Warning Queue Entry 1 was retrieved from the drive The BTR returned the ASCII text Vel Fdbk Loss with each two characters reversed The fault occurred at 10 14am on Thursday February 23 1995 Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N10 10 3 viso A BTW Data File BTR Data File wooo ooo foo pg i 7 ASCII Display Values Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 EE Memory Request Save Recall Initialize 7 27 This message is sent by the PLC Communications Adapter Board to activate the BRAM functions detailed in the message request PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Decimal Value 31998 EE Command PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 4 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Header Word 2 PLC Decimal Value 710 Message OK 31998 Message Error Header Word 3 Header Word 4 Value EE Command 00 Note Used EE Save EE Recall EE Default Initialize Message Operation The BRAM memory function allows three d
16. 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Last State 0 Data zeroed 1 Last state Rack Inhibit Flt 36025 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Notused When RIO scanner is used Enums Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bitod L Rck Flt Grp 0 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 2 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 4 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 6 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Inhibit Grp 0 0 Group 0 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 0 Inhibit Grp 2 0 Group 2 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 2 Inhibit Grp 4 0 Group 4 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 4 Inhibit Grp 6 0 Group 6 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 42 431 Channel B Remote I O Warning Select ChB RIOA Warn Sel adapter mode ChB RIOS Warn Sell scanner mode ChB RIOx Warn Sel dictates whether the PLC Communications Adapter Board will report a warning condition or no action if a PLC controller RIO communications fault occurs at channel B ChB RIOx Warn Sel is not used if channel B is set up for DH communications Parameter Number 431 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value File Group 15 adapter or 255 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select Status W
17. 475 Read Write Sink Dependent on Link 0 327670 32767 Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rom then Tr3 Opnd Parm X s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 476 Trend 3 Operand Parameter Y Tr3 Opnd Parm Y Tr3 Opnd Parm Y specifies the second of two parameter numbers used for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered link parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 476 Read Write Sink Dependent on Link 0 327670 327670 Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rom then Tr3 Opnd Parm Y s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 52 values are rounded down to the nearest 2 millisecond interval 477 Trend 3 Operator Parameter Number 477 Tr3 Operator Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Tr3 Operator specifies the operator used for the Factory Default 5 trend trigger eval
18. 6 26 363 Channel B Remote I O Output 4 ChB RIOA Out 4 adapter mode ChB RIOS Out 4 scanner mode ChB RIOx Out 4 contains the fifth word or data group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3630 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size 364 Channel B Remote I O Output 5 Parameter Number 3640 ChB RIOA Out5 adapter mode Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None ChB RIOS Out5 scanner mode Factory Default None ChB RIOx Out5 contains the sixth word or data Minimum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The Maximum Value on 32767 data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can This parameter is not availab
19. Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 492 Tr4 Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 55 441 SP Warn Sel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 493 Trend Out 4 9 Trend 1 0 6 56 442 SP Fault Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 46 Parameters included in Groups 7 and 8 depend on the selected communications gt enabled Shaded parameters do not exist when DH is selected Inputs are variable and depend on rack size and whether block transfer is Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 4 Parameter Files and Groups Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Parameters are divided into four files to help ease programming and operator access The four files are e Startup file e Communications I O file e Velocity Torque file e Diagnostics file These files are divided into groups and each parameter is an element in a specific group Parameters may be used as elements in more than one group You can also view the parameters in a linear mode This allows you to view the entire parameter table in numerical order For additional information on parameter viewing modes refer to the 1336 FORCE User Manual The following tables list the parameters that are available in each file and group Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 FORCE User Manual File 1 Startup Drive Data Group Language Sel Encoder PPR Base Motor Speed Base Motor HP Base Motor Curr Base Motor Volt Base Motor Freq Motor Poles Torque
20. Clear Fault Owner Par 379 Permanent Link it0 Ramp Stop it1 Start it2 Jogl it3 Clear Fault it 4 Forward it5 Reverse it6 Jog2 it7 Current Limit S top it 8 Coast to Stop it9 Velocity Ramp Disable it 10 Flux Enable Magnetizing Flux it 11 Process Trim Enable it 12 Velocity Reference Select A it 13 Velocity Reference Select B it 14 Velocity Reference Select C it 15 Reset Drive The owner parameters 369 through 379 are covered in the next section Configuring the SCANport Controls The SCANport controls are the functions that control the motor such as start stop and jog The control can come from up to five SCANport devices and two RIO inputs parameters 367 and 368 at the same time The control is based on an ownership mechanism that allows certain functions to only have one owner and other functions to have multiple owners Speed reference direction and local functions are the only one owner functions The other functions such as start stop and jog are considered multiple owner functions Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Note When you apply power to the system the default input speed reference is specified in SP Default Ref parameter 416 You can change the value of SP Default Ref at any time but the change does not take effect until the power is cycled SP Default Ref may be set
21. Clock Time Date Day Time Clock Year Month Message Operation The Real Time Clock Data Read function reads the real time clock data from the drive The Clock Time is returned in the order shown in the header message You should view this information as ASCII text The Time is based on a 24 hour clock Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Real Time Clock Data Read continued 7 45 This field Indicates Seconds The seconds and tenths of milliseconds Date The date of the month in ASCII The day of the week where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Day Saturday Year The number of the year 1990 is referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Month The month of the year where 1 is January and 12 is December If an error occurs in the block transfer a value of 29952 is returned in word 2 of the BTR response Example In this example the clock was read with a value of 2816 in word 2 of the BTW The BTR response indicated a successful read with a value of 2816 in word 2 e Word 4 indicated a changing value for seconds e The Hour value OE indicates hour 14 of a 24 hour clock or 2 pm The minute value QA indicates 10 or 12 10 pm e The Date of 17 in ASCII is the 23 and the 5 day of the month or Thursday e The Year 05 is 1995 e The Month of 02 is February Data Format 0 1 2 BTW BTR N10 90 2816 7681 3594 5893 1282 Data File ASCII Display Va
22. For example if you plug a HIM into port 1 to control the external velocity you need to enter a value of 1 for SCANport Analog Input Select parameter 391 and link External Velocity parameter 101 to SCANport Analog Input parameter 338 You may scale the velocity by using External Velocity Scale parameter 102 The drive sends SCANport Analog Output parameter 386 to all devices connected to SCANport To send data out to the SCANport devices you must link SCANport Analog Output to a source parameter For example if the HIM is to receive Velocity Feedback you would link SCANport Analog Output parameter 386 to Velocity Feedback parameter 269 Understanding Function Blocks 5 11 At times you may want to customize the way your drive operates To help you with this task function blocks have been included with the PLC Communications Adapter Board You can combine function blocks together to operate on almost any part of the drive functionality The flexibility of the function block system allows blocks to be used with the drive s velocity or current control parameters drive to drive parameters as well as analog and remote T O image parameters Important This section is intended to be an overview of the function block system For more in depth information refer to the Function Block Programming Manual The function block software provides the following advantages e On smaller stand alone applications control progr
23. If you use the NOR operator and set Operand Y to a mask value of 0000 0001 0100 0000 the trigger condition is only true when Operand X has a value of XXXX XXX xOxx xxxx XXXX XxxO xOxx XXXX XXXX XXXO x1xx xXxxx Adjusting the Data Sample Rate Setting the Number of Post Samples You can specify how often you want the PLC Communications Adapter Board to take data samples Data samples may be taken in a range of 2 milliseconds to 30 seconds in 2 millisecond increments The rate at which the data is sampled and at which the trigger condition is evaluated is the same up to 20 milliseconds This assures that possible trigger conditions are monitored whenever the sample rate exceeds 20 milliseconds To set the data sample rate 1 Select the Sample Rate parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 458 468 478 or 488 2 Enter the sample rate The drive rounds this value to the nearest 2 millisecond interval You can change the sample rate while the trend is active You also need to specify the number of data samples taken once a trigger condition occurs You can specify that 0 through 499 post samples be taken with one sample reserved for the instance when the trigger condition becomes true Typically when a trend buffer is set to trigger on a fault you would set the post sample parameter to a lower number such as 20 This allows you to evaluate the trended parameters data from before the trigger When a trend
24. Not Used Clear Fault Clear Fault Queue Drive Reset Message Operation The Fault Clear Reset function specified in the BTW sends a fault handling request to the drive e A Clear Fault Request clears the last fault that occurred and makes the drive available to run e A Clear Fault Queue clears the entire fault buffer e A Drive Reset resets the drive and clears any parameters or links not saved Parameter information stored in EEPROM is written to RAM If an error has occurred in the block transfer word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 30976 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Fault Clear Reset continued 7 19 Example In this example a Fault Clear Request was sent to the drive through the block transfer The BTR response indicated a successful clear by returning a value of 1792 in word 2 and a value of 0 in word 4 Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW Data File BTR This value varies depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 20 Fault Queue The Trip Fault Queue Number message provides the fault queue Trip Fault Queue Number number of the fault that caused the drive to trip PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Header 3 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header Drive Response Block Transfer Read
25. e BRAM Initialize Writes the factory set default values and links to RAM Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Parameter Listing The following table lists the parameters in numerical order No Name Group Page No Name Group Page 300 Adapter ID 1 Adapter Info 6 12 344 Data OutA2 3 SCANport I O 6 21 301 Adapter Version 1 Adapter Info 6 12 345 Data OutB1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 302 SP Comm Retries 1 Adapter Info 6 12 l 346 Data Out B2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 303 ChA DIP Switch 7 Channel A 6 12 347 Data OutC1 3 SCANport 0 6 21 304 ChB DIP Switch 8 Channel B 6 12 l 348 Data Out C2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 22 305 ChA LED State 7 Channel A 6 12 349 Data OutD1 3 SCANport 0 6 22 306 ChB LED State 8 Channel B 6 13 350 Data OutD2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 22 307 PLC Comm Status 1 Adapter Info 6 13 l 351 ChA RIO Out 0 7 Channel A 6 22 309 Language Sel 1 Adapter Info 6 13 352 ChA RIO Out 1 7 Channel A 6 22 314 Data In A1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 353 ChA RIO Out2 7 Channel A 6 23 315 Data In A2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 354 ChA RIO Out3 7 Channel A 6 23 316 Data In B1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 355 ChA RIO Out4 7 Channel A 6 23 317 Data In B2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 356 ChA RIO
26. wy Allen Bradley 1336 FORCE PLCE Communications Adapter Series B Firmware Rev 5 xx Catalog No 1336T GT1EN User Manual Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will the Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation the Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Allen Bradley Company with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written
27. 1 4 parameters 2 1 setting up the SCAN port parameters 5 14 SP Analog In parameter 6 20 SP Analog Out ere 6 3 SP Analog Sel parameter B baud rate selection 2 4 block transfer examples of 3 15 explanation of L7 1 status word transferring data BRAM enable disable functions L6 1 BRAM Save Recall Initialize 7 27 Index C cable specifications for port wiring 1 4 channel choosing for controll 6 4q channel A fer ChA Fault Sts parameter ChA RIO Flt Sel parameter 6 38 ChA RIO Warn Sel parameter 6 39 ChA RIOS Retries parameter 6 40 ChA Warn Sts parameter displaying current DIP switch settings displaying current LED state logic command parameter 6 27 remote I O input parameters 6 154 6 17 remote I O output parameters 6 22 channel B ChB Fault Sts parameter 6 44 ChB RIO Fit Self 6 41 ChB RIO Warn Sel parameter 6 42 ChB RIOS Retries parameter 6 43 ChB Warn Sts parameter 6 45 displaying current DIP switch settings displaying current LED state logic command parameter 6 27 remote I O input parameters 6 17 6 20 remote 1 0 output parameters 6 25 Clear Run Time Accumulator 7 50 communications configuration DH configuration RIO configruation 1 8 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance P 7 contents of manual P 4 Continuous Parameter Link Read _ 7 34 Continuous Parameter Link Write
28. 1 4 Rack Ful 34 12 M 0 2 0 2 4 0 2 4 6 wS 13 1 3 57 2 4 2 4 6 3 5 35 7 4 6 5 7 YOU FR WNP o TB21 Drive Parameters OUTI Par 401 Scale Filtered Vel F dbk g COMI Par 400 Offse E OUT2 Par 403 Scale Computed P ower 39 g coma Par 402 Offse ae OUT3 Par 405 Scale Motor C t Magn Fdbk ta Cen agn COM Par 404 Offse SD OUT4 Par 407 Scale Motor Volt Magn o ooro tagn COM Par 406 Offse CD velRef2Hi 1 paraa sata N1 Par 392 Offse Proc Trim F dbk bie Kara Cale N2 Par 394 Offse Analog In 3 Na Ar 3A Cale N3 Par 396 Offse Analog In 4 N4 Par 399 Scale N4 Par 398 Offse 10V REF REF COM 10V REF ChB Logic Cmd Velocity Ref 1 Hi Torque Mode Sel Proc Trim Ref Logic Sts Lo Filtered Vel Fdbk Motor Current Magn Fdbk Motor Volt Magn Computed P ower Stator Frequency Filtered Vel Fdbk Computed P ower Motor Current Magn F dbk Motor Volt Magn Vel Ref 2 Hi Proc Trim F dbk Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 16 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter Objectives Understanding RIO Communications Chapter 3 Using Remote I O Communications This chapter provides information that can help you understand and use the remote I O RIO communications This chapter covers the following topics e understanding RIO communications e transferring data using discrete data transfer e
29. 150 152 155 142 145 143 144 Velocity Reg Vel Reg Output Ki Velocity Loop Kp Velocity Loop Kf Velocity Loop Velocity Error Vel Reg TP Sel Vel Reg TP Low Vel Reg TP Hi 134 139 140 141 138 137 135 136 Torque Ref Torque Mode Sel Torq Mode Stat Pos Mtr Cur Lmt Neg Mtr Cur Lmt Int Torque Ref Internal Iq Ref Computed Power Torq Lmt Stat External Iq Ref Ext Torq Ref 1 Ext Torg Ref 2 Slave Torque 1 Slave Torque 2 Ext Torque Step Notch Filter Freq Notch Filter Q Min Flux Level Pos Mtr Tor Lmt Neg Mtr Tor Lmt Motor Power Lmt Regen Power Lmt Di Dt Limit Torq Ref TP Sel Torque Ref TP P Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 FORCE user manual 53 184 179 180 167 168 182 183 161 162 164 163 166 156 157 174 175 176 177 178 181 173 172 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Torque Block PWM Frequency Prech Radthru Sel Under Volt Stpnt Prechrg Timeout Ridethru Timeout CP Options Ki Freq Reg Kp Freq Reg Kff Freq Reg Ksel Freq Reg Freq Track Filt Track Filt Type Freq Trim Filter 222 223 224 225 226 227 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc Proc T Tri Tri Tri Tri Tri Tri Tri Tri Tri ri ri ri Process Trim im Ref im F dbk im Output im Select im Ki im Kp im Lo Lmt im Hi Lmt im Fltr W im Data im Out K im TP
30. 469 9 Trends 6 50 DIP Fault Setup 435 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 43 Tr2 Sample Rate 468 9 Trends 6 50 Dir Mask 409 4 Masks 6 35 Tr2 Select 471 9 Trends 6 50 Dir Owner 370 5 Owners 6 28 Tr2 Status 472 9 Trends 6 50 Flux Owner 376 5 Owners 6 29 Tr3 Cont Trigger 480 9 Trends 6 52 og 1 Owner 372 5 Owners 6 28 Tr3 Operator 477 9 Trends 6 52 og 2 Owner 373 5 Owners 6 28 Tr3 Opnd Parm X 475 9 Trends 6 51 og Mask 411 4 Masks 6 36 Tr3 Opnd Parm Y 476 9 Trends 6 51 Language Sel 309 1 Adapter Info 6 13 Tr3 Post Samples 479 9 Trends 6 52 Local Mask 415 4 Masks 6 36 Tr3 Sample Rate 478 9 Trends 6 52 Local Owner 375 5 Owners 6 29 Tr3 Select 481 9 Trends 6 53 PLC Comm Status 307 1 Adapter Info 6 13 Tr3 Status 484 9 Trends 6 53 Port Enable 408 4 Masks 6 35 Tr4 Cont Trigger 490 9 Trends 6 55 Ramp Owner 378 5 Owners 6 29 Tr4 Operator 487 9 Trends 6 54 Redund Chan No 427 7 Channel A 6 40 Tr4 Opnd Parm X 485 9 Trends 6 54 Ref Mask 412 4 Masks 6 36 Tr4 Opnd Parm Y 486 9 Trends 6 54 Reset Drive mask 414 4 Masks 6 36 Tr4 Post Samples 489 9 Trends 6 55 Set Ref Owner 374 5 Owners 6 28 Tr4 Sample Rate 488 9 Trends 6 54 SP Analog In 338 3 SCANport I O 6 20 Tr4 Select 491 9 Trends 6 55 SP Analog Out 386 3 SCANport 1 0 6 30 Tr4 Status 494 9 Trends 6 55 SP Analog Sel 391 3 SCANport 1 0 6 3
31. Bit 4 Forward Bit12 Vel Ref A 011 Preset Speed 2 par 120 it5 it13 100 Preset Speed 3 par 121 Bits Reverse Bit13 e Ref B 101 Preset Speed 4 par 122 Bit6 Jog 2 Bit 14 VelRefC 110 Preset Speed 5 par 123 Bit 7 Limit Stop Bit 15 Reset Drive 111 External Ref 2 par 104 103 368 Channel B Logic Command Input Parameter Number 368 ChB Logic Cmd In Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits This logic command parameter is for Channel B Factory Default 0 Hex ChB Logic Cmd In is permanently linked to Minimum Value 0 Hex parameter 52 logic command word Maximum Value FFFF Hex File Group Communications 1 0 Logic Velocity Torque Logic Enums Bit 0 Normal Stop Bit 8 Coast Stop Bit 1 Start Bit 9 Vel Ramp Disable CBA P 10 000 Zero ne Jog1 Bi 10 li Enne 001 ExternalRef1 par 101 100 Bit3 Clear Fault Bit 11 Process Trim 010 Preset Speed 1 par 119 Bit 4 F orward Bit12 Vel RefA 011 Preset Speed 2 par 120 it5 it13 100 Preset Speed 3 par 121 Bits ee Bit 13 Ref B 101 Preset Speed 4 par 122 Bit6 og 2 Bit14 VelRefC 110 Preset Speed 5 par 123 Bit 7 Limit Stop Bit 15 Reset Drive 111 External Ref 2 par 104 103 369 Stop Owner Parameter Number 369 Stop Owner Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Stop Owner displays which ports are presently Factory Default 0 issuing a valid Stop command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communicatio
32. FLEX I O Discrete Modules Data Input 1 24V DC 16PtOut Data Input 2 O 24V DC 16Pt Out Data Out 1 O 24V DC 16PtIn Data Out be o _24V DC 1ePtin 1 4 Rack Mod Group 2 Addr 1 N gt nN Channel B can be configured in either RIO Scanner or Adapter modes or use DH for use with DriveManager PLC 5 as Adapter or 1771 ASB Module E RIOA IN 4 ar Output Card RIOA IN 5 O Output Card Switch Card RIDA OUT he o Switch Card 1 4 Rack Mod Group 4 Addr 1 w gt w RIO ChA Lgc Cmd H RIO ChB Lgc Cmd HE RIO Communications SCANport to Standard Adapter p Logic Command In a Logic Command ExtVelRefIn pP Ext Vel Ref Logic Status Out O Logic Status Vel Feedback Out an aa Vel Feedback 1 4 Rack Mod Group 6 Addr 1 gt gt Analog Inputs and Outputs ies Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 15 In the previous figure In Drive A links were established between the function block control application and the drive I O parameters Channel A of Drive A is connected to four 1 4 rack adapters by daisy chaining a single blue hose By setting up Drive A in scanner mode Drive A can act as a master device and the 1 4 rack adapters can act as slave devices Drive B is connected to Drive A using Drive to Drive communications via a DeviceNet cable You can use Drive to Drive communications to connect any FORCE drive with either a Standard Adapter or a PLC
33. PLC Decimal Value 1793 Message OK 30975 Message Error 1793 Word 2 Header Word 3 Fault Queue Size Message Operation The Trip Fault Queue Number function provides the entry number of the fault in the fault queue that tripped the drive The BTR response contains that number in word 4 The Fault Queue Number is 0 when the drive is not faulted If an error has occurred in the block transfer word 2 of the response will be 30975 Example In this example the first entry in the drive fault queue has caused the drive to trip Word 4 of the BTR indicates the entry number Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 N10 90 1794 1 These values vary depending on parameters and products BTW Data File BTR Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 21 Fault Queue The Fault Entry Read Full function reads the contents of the fault Fault Entry Read Full queue entry number specified A message is returned that includes the fault text and fault code associated with the specified fault queue entry and the time stamp associated with the fault PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 12 or 16 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message 3 PLC Decimal Value 1792 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 1792 Message OK 30976 Message Error Word 2 Fault Queue Entry
34. Preset 32767 Accum Rung 2 3 o End of File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 16 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The first rung causes a Block Transfer Write BTW to the PLC Communications Adapter Board when the user logic bit is true No data is available from the drive for the PLC to read when the drive is ready to accept a BTW The second rung causes a Block Transfer Read BTR from the PLC Communications Adapter Board when data is available from the drive for the PLC to read The BTR rung is not conditioned with any user logic because a BTR should occur whenever data is available for the PLC to read from the PLC Communications Adapter Board The third rung causes a counter to increment each time the block transfer ERROR bit 1 020 14 goes true You can use this bit to detect problems with the link from the PLC controller to the SCANport device 3 17 The following program is for a PLC 5 20 5 40 5 60 or 5 80 Rung 2 0 BT BT Read Write User Available Available Logic BTR_AVAIL BTW_AVAIL 1 000 1 020 1 020 BTW 1e BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE EN 00 12 Rack 02 Group 0 FA DN DR Module 0 Control Block BT11 0 ER BT_ERROR Data File N10 10 1 020 Length 64 Continuous 14 BT Read Rung 2 1 Available BTR_AVAIL 1 020 BTR BLOCK TRANSFER READ EN Rack 02 Group 0 F DN Module 0 Control Block BT11 1 ER Data File N10 90 Length 64 Continuous BT Rung 2
35. This is defined through the DIP switches U3 or U5 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board Destination Data Table Address Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The starting address represents the type of service requested at the PLC Communications Adapter Board destination file Refer to the DH Command Set section for more information DH Command Set 4 3 The PLC Communications Adapter Board supports a limited set of PC commands by emulating a section of PLC 5 memory The memory area emulated determines what specific request or action the PLC Communications Adapter Board will take The following commands are supported Command WHO ACTIVE Description The station number of the PLC Communications Adapter Board as defined by its DIP switch settings is displayed on the WHO ACTIVE screen of the PLC software It will read PLC 5 15 1336T next to the selected station number PLC 5 TYPED READ N10 1 493 Memory area N10 1 493 translates into a read parameter value from the 1336 FORCE Any attempt to read outside of this range results in an error response The 1336 FORCE interprets the values 1 through 493 as parameter numbers For example to read the value of parameter 133 the MSG instruction would request N10 133 with a size of one element A size of 10 would read parameters 133 through 142 PLC 5 TYPED WRITE N10 1 493 Memory area N10 1 493 translates into one or more write param
36. Trl Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 47 394 An In 2 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 458 Trl Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 47 395 An In 2 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 459 Trl Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 47 396 An In 3 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 460 Trl Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 48 397 An In 3 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 461 Trl Select 9 Trend Setup 6 48 398 An In 4 Offset 6 Analog I O 6 32 462 Tri Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 48 399 An In 4 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 463 Trend Out 1 9 Trend I O 6 48 400 An Out 1 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 464 Trendin 2 9 Trend 1 0 6 49 401 An Out 1 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 465 Tr2 Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 49 402 An Out2 Offset 6 Analog I O 6 33 466 Tr2 Opnd ParmY 9 Trend Setup 6 49 403 An Out 2 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 467 Tr2 Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 49 404 An Out3 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 468 Tr2 Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 50 405 An Out 3 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 469 Tr2 Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 50 406 An Out4 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 470 Tr2 Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 50 407 An Out 4 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 35 471 Tr2 Select 9 Trend Setup 6 50 408 PortEnable 4 Masks 6 35 472 Tr2 Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 50 409 Dir Mask 4 Masks 6 35 473 Trend Out 2 9 Trend 1 0 6 51 410 Start Mask 4 Masks 6 35 474 Trend In 3 9 Trend I O 6 51 411 Jog Mask 4 Mask
37. Vel Reg TP Sel Vel Reg TP Low Vel Reg TP Hi Vel Ref TP Sel Vel Ref TP Low Vel Ref TP Hi Auto Tune TP Sel Auto Tune TP Data Logic Tstpt Sel Logic Tstpt Data Fault TP Sel Fault TP Torq Ref TP Sel Torque Ref TP Torq TP Sel 1 Torg TP Data 1 145 143 144 Si 135 136 110 108 109 47 48 if 70 99 98 Wie 172 273 274 Fault Sel Sts ChA Fit Sts ChA Warn Sts ChB Fit Sts ChB Warn Sts SP Fault Sts SP Warn Sts SP Fault Sel SP Warn Sel ChA Flt Sel ChB Flt Sel ChA Warn Sel ChB Warn Sel CP Fit Status VP Fit Status CP Warn Status VP Warn Status CP Fit Warn Cfg CP Warn None Cfg VP Flit Warn Cfg VP Warn None Cfg Nofig Fit Status Pwrup Flt Status Max DB Power Max DB Temp DB Time Const 436 437 438 439 442 443 440 441 425 430 426 431 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 81 80 71 78 719 Motor Overload Mtr Overload Lim Mtr Overld Spd 1 Mtr Overld Spd 2 Min Overload Lmt Service F actor Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 FORCE user manual 92 95 96 97 94 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 10 Transistor Diag Autotun Diag Sel Logic Options Tran Diag Disabl Inverter Diag 1 Inverter Diag 2 Iq Offset Id Offset 256 59 257 258 259 260 261 Trl Status Tr2 Status Tr3 Status Tr4 Status Trend In 1 Trend In 2 Trend In 3 Trend In 4 Trend Out1 Trend Out2 Trend Out 3 Trend Out 4 Trend 1 0 462 412 482 492 454 464 41
38. When a fault condition that is specific to RIO communications occurs the PLC Communications Adapter Board first checks parameter 425 or 430 If the bit representing the fault condition is set the condition is reported as a soft fault If the bit is not set the PLC Communications Adapter Board then checks parameter 426 or 431 If the corresponding bit is set in 426 or 431 but not set in parameter 425 or 430 the condition is reported as a warning If the bit is not set in either parameter the PLC Communications Adapter Board does not report the condition and drive operation continues unaffected Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 6 Fault Code Descriptions PLC Communications Adapter Board fault and warning codes are five character decimal numbers that have the following format stat x x x S Source Designator 0 Main Board Velocity Processor 1 Main Board Current Processor 2 Adapter Processor 3 PLC Interface Board Processor 4 Reserved 5 Reserved Fault Displays A XXX Area Designator Internal Fault Code 0 General 1 Motor 2 Inverter 3 Motor Control 4 Reserved Adapter 5 External Device 6 Communications 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Converter Brake Both HIM and GPT LCD displays indicate a fault or warning by showing the adapter code and fault text Fault text may be up to 16 characters in length The following are the fault codes Fault text and Fault PEDS
39. code type Description Suggested action This entry in the fault or Faults Cleared warning queue is displayed 24000 pane when you request a clear fault pine command Reset the drive If the fault persists 1 Execute a BRAM recall Adpt BRAM Merde a bere paney DENEN 2 Execute a BRAM store the calculated checksum and the Cksm Soft 3 Reset the drive saved checksum for the adapter 24009 data 4 Clear the faults When you are done with these steps verify all parameter values Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Fault text and Fault ecu sade bp Description Suggested action Reset the drive If the fault persists 1 Execute a BRAM recall There is a discrepancy between 2 Execute a BRAM store Drv Types Differ Soft the drive type on the base driver 3R he dri 24010 board and the parameter 220 pee eu Aan Vee and 221 values in BRAM 4 Clear the faults When you are done with these steps verify all parameter values The drive type code in Serial E2 I11 Drive Type on the base driver board is not a 24011 Hard valid code per the lanowase Replace the base driver board module table Reset the drive If the fault persists 1 Execute a BRAM recall Main BRAM Terei icp nny Pelee 2 Execute a BRAM store the calculated checksum and the Cksm Soft 3 Reset the drive saved checksum for the main 24012 control board 4 Clear the faults When you are done with these steps verify all parameter
40. functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3240 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 16 325 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 3 ChA RIOA In 3 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 3 scanner mode ChA RIOX In 3 contains the fourth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3250 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not ava
41. the control function is enabled There are three levels of masking control functions gt Direction gt Start PortEnable gt Local Jog gt Reference gt Clear Fault gt Reset Drive The Port Enable mask can enable or disable all of the device s control functions If the Port Enable mask is set to enable the control functions the control is passed to the Local Mask The Local Mask can allow a device to take full control of a drive If the device does not have full control then the individual masks can take effect Setting the Loss of Communications Fault You can specify how you want to be notified if SCANport loses the connection to a port If you want a communications loss to Then be Set the appropriate bit in parameter 440 corresponding to the SCANport Set the appropriate bit in parameter Reported as a warning 441 and do not set clear the bit in parameter 440 Reported as a fault Do not set clear the appropriate bit in Ignored either parameter 440 or 441 The following table shows you which bits correspond to which ports This bit Represents 1 SCANport device 1 2 SCANport device 2 3 SCANport device 3 4 SCANport device 4 5 SCANport device 5 For example if you want a fault condition to be reported if communication is lost with device 3 you would set bit 3 of parameter 440 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 a fF O N SCANport Image In 5 9
42. to external reference 1 or 2 or preset speeds 1 2 3 4 or 5 Ownership is when a SCANport device commands a function As long as that function is commanded that device is the owner of that function For example if device 1 is commanding a forward direction which is a one owner function no other device can change the direction until device 1 stops commanding the forward direction If device 1 is commanding a start which is a multiple owner function other devices can also command a start If device 1 stops commanding the start the drive does not stop running if another device is still commanding the start Note A rising edge is required for start and jog functions If a jog or start is still commanded after the drive is stopped start and jog functions will not operate from any device until the jog or start commands are removed Determining Function Ownership To determine which device is issuing a specific command you can use parameters 369 through 379 To determine which device is issuing Check this parameter this command Stop 369 Direction control 370 Start 371 Jogl S12 Jog2 373 Velocity reference 374 Local control 375 Flux enable 376 Trim enable 377 Ramp 378 Clear fault 379 For each of these parameters each bit represents a device If this bit is set Then the owner is 1 SCANport device 1 2 SCANport device 2 3 SCANport device 3 4 SCANport device 4 5 SCANp
43. 00am You can then use this information to track scheduled maintenance down times or other information as desired Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTR i BTW Data File ASCII Display Values Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Time Stamp Load Clock Info Reference Stamp 7 55 The Load Clock Info Reference Stamp message loads the real time clock data into the reference stamp PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Message Length 0 Header PLC Decimal Value 2818 Message OK 29950 Message Error Word 2 Header Word 3 Message Operation The Load Clock Info Reference Stamp function specified in the BTW sends the real time clock data to the reference stamp The reference stamp time then follows the real time clock data Example In this example the request to load the real time clock data into the reference stamp was sent through the BTW The BTR responded with a message of OK Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW Data File BTR Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 56 Trend File The Number of Trends Available function indicates how many trend Number of Trends Available files the drive supports PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR inst
44. 10 6 31 2 10 6 31 Analog Input 2 Scale 2 10 6 32 2 10 6 32 Ana Ana Ana Ana Ana Ana Ana Index 1 3 og Output 2 Sca rat og Output 3 og Output 3 Offs og Output 3 Sca aid og Output 4 pa og Output 4 Offset 2 14 og Output 4 Sca Channel A DIP Switch 6 12 Channel A Fault Status 6 43 Channel A LED State 6 12 Channel A Logic Command Input 5 1 Channel A Remote 1 0 Fault Select Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 0 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 1 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 2 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 3 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 4 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 5 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 6 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 7 6 1 Channel A Remote I O Output 0 Channel A Remote I O Output 1 Channel A Remote I O Output 2 Channel A Remote I O Output 3 Channel A Remote I O Output 4 Channel A Remote I O Output 5 Channel A Remote I O Output 6 Channel A Remote 1 0 Output 7 _6 34 6 38 Channel A Remote I O Warning Select Channe i RIO Scanner Retries 6 40 Channel A Warning Status 6 44 Channel B DIP Switch 6 12 Channel B Fault Status Channel B LED State 6 13 Channel B Logic Command Input 5 1 Channel B Remote 1 0 Fault Select 6 41 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 0 6 17 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 1 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 2 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 3 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 4 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 5 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 6 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 7
45. 1336 FORCE You should refer to this figure to help understand the following description 1336 FORCE Output Image Table Rack 2 0 020 Group 0 PLC Communications A Adapter Board Drive Parameters Reserved for block transfer Sources Link 0 021 Group 1 ChA Logic Cmd In 0 022 Group 2 0 023 Group 3 0 024 Group 4 0 025 Group 5 0 026 Group 6 0 027 Group 7 Sources C101 gt Velocity Ref1HI lt Ext Torque Ref 1 Input Image Table Rack 2 020 Group 0 024 Group 4 025 Group 5 026 Group 6 027 Group 7 Reserved for block transfer Sinks Link 021 Group 1 Logic Status Low 022 Group 2 aie th 023 Group 3 C 146 gt Velocity Feedback C gt In this example the drive has been configured so that the data coming into source parameter 331 is linked to parameter 367 ChA Logic Cmd In Information linked to the 1336 FORCE using the 16 bit output word for group 1 of rack 2 must be a 16 bit word where the bits are defined by the description of parameter 367 Parameter 101 Velocity Ref 1 HI has been linked to source parameter 332 The 16 bit output word for group 2 of rack 2 must be a 16 bit signed integer whose value is within the allowable range of values in drive units for parameter 101 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 8 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Information from the
46. 16384 Trend 4 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 74 Stored File Data The offset specifies where in the buffer you want to start reading the continued 32 data points For example if you specify an offset of 64 the Run File Data function returns the 32 data samples starting from data sample 64 If you request less than 32 trend samples then the file data is padded with zeros If you request data samples past the end of the buffer then the file data is padded with zeros This data is read from the triggered trend file Once the buffer is filled based on the post sample number no more data is stored and the file does not change Example In this example Trend 1 has tripped and the message request gets the data around the trigger condition Data Format BTW BTR N1090 35 4101 4191 4092 4091 4094 4091 4097 4096 4098 Data File N10 100 4099 4100 4099 4101 4102 4100 4099 4098 4100 4101 N10 110 4101 4102 4101 4099 4097 4095 4097 4100 4100 4099 was ao ae am famefae ff Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 75 Trend File The Trend Parameter Definition allows you to read the list of trend Trend Parameter Definition parameter numbers from the database PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 13 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message
47. 5 Par 364 ChB RIO Out 6 Par 365 ChB RIO Out 7 P ar 366 RIO Channel B Analog In 1 Par 339 Analog Out 1 Par 387 Analog Out 1 Scale Par 401 Analog Out 1 Offset Par 400 Analog Output 1 Analog Input 2 Analog In 2 Offset Par 394 gt Analog In 2 Scale Analog In 2 Par 340 Analog Out 2 Par 388 Analog Out 2 Scale Par 403 Analog Out 2 Offset Par 402 Analog Output 2 Analog Input 3 gt Analog In 3 Offset Par 396 gt Analog In 3 Scale Analog In 3 Par 341 Analog Out 3 Par 389 Analog Out 3 Scale Par 405 gt Analog Out 3 Offset Par 404 Analog Output 3 Analog Input 4 gt Analog In 4 Offset Par 398 gt Analog In 4 Scale Analog In 4 Par 342 Analog Out 4 Par 390 Analog Out 4 Scale Par 407 gt Analog Out 4 Offset Par 406 Analog Output 4 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Hardware Block Diagram AP Status AP Status Fault Out Ext Fault Norm Stop Fault Out Drive Enable Discrete I O Jumpers 10 5 The following is the hardware block diagram for the PLC Communications Adapter Board Language Module J1 ChannelA PLC Interface Port 6 24V _120V 24V __120V co 24V_120V co 24V 120V CA 12345678910 Port 7 J2 Channel B Drive Enable Motor Thermo Norm Stop Ext Fault Input Com Fault NC Fault COM Fault NO UAPI TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 DGND V 15V AGND 15V g g g g g DIP Switch DIP Switc DIP Switch DIP Swit
48. 5 13 September 1998 Force a trigger for the specified trend Trend Command continued 7 59 Example In this example a disable trend command is sent for trend 4 Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BTW 8 9 BTR Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 60 Trend File The Trend Status function allows you to read the status of the Trend Status specified trend file PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header 3 Word 1 Message Length 4 PLC Decimal Value 4097 Message OK 28671 Message Error PLC Decimal Value Header 4097 Word 2 Header Trend Number Word 3 Trend Number Message Operation You can use the Trend Status function to read the status of the trend specified by Trend Number The following are the valid trend numbers This number Specifies that the command is to be sent for en T 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 The following are the possible status values that can be returned in word 4 ee Indicates that the trend is 1 Stopped 2 Running 3 In the tripped trigger state The condition has become true and the post samples are being taken In the forced trigger state The trigger condition 4 was forced to be true so that the post samples could be taken
49. 5 13 September 1998 7 36 Continuous Parameter Link Write Example continued In this example a group of four continuous links were sent to the drive starting at parameter 119 Word 3 of the BTW header message defines a length of four links Word 4 defines the starting link sink parameter 119 Words 5 through 8 list the source parameters that are linked to the four continuous sink parameters parameters 119 through 122 The BTR message returns the status of the write request Zeros returned in words 5 through 8 indicate that the write was successful Data Format 0 BTW l Data File N10 0 a fame a 119 339 340 341 342 na Data File N10 90 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 37 Link Write The Scattered Parameter Link Write function writes a scattered Scattered Parameter Link Write group of links to the drive PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 5 63 words BTR instruction length 5 63 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length Header 5 63 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 32763 Word 2 Number of Parameter Header Links to Write Word 3 Data Parameter Number 1 Data Link Number 1 Data Parameter Number 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 5 M OK 32763 Message Error Word 2 Number of Parameter Header Links to Write Word 3 Bit15 Parameter Data Number 1 Word 4 Data Status 1 or
50. 5 7 32 Link Write Link Parameter Write 30464 7 34 Continuous Parameter Link Write 32764 7 35 Scattered Parameter Link Write 32763 7 37 Parameter Link Clear 30464 7 39 User Text String User Text String Read 261 7 40 User Text String Write 32507 1 42 Clock Data Real Time Clock Data R ead 2816 7 44 Real Time Clock Data Write 2816 7 46 Run Time Accumulator Run Time Accumulator Data Read 2817 7 48 Clear Run Time Accumulator 29950 7 50 Time Stamp Reference Time Stamp Data Read 2816 7 51 Reference Time Stamp Data Write 29952 7 53 Load Clock Info Reference Stamp 0 7 55 Trend File Number of Trends Available 4096 7 56 Maximum Trend Size Available 4097 7 57 Trend Command 28672 7 58 Trend Status 4097 7 60 Setup Data Full 28670 7 62 All Info 4098 7 65 Trigger Time 4099 7 68 Run File Data 4100 7 70 Stored File Data 4101 71 73 Trend Parameter Definition 4102 7 75 Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Values 4103 7 71 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 4 Parameter Read This message is sent by the PLC Communications Adapter Board Parameter Value Read and reads the 16 bit parameter data value for the parameter number selected PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 769 Message OK 31999 Message Error Messag
51. Cmd 388 gt _ _ To lt 33 ChB RIO In 1 VelRef 1 Hi 0 lt 332 ChBRIOIn2 Torque Mode Sel lt 53D ___ To lt 333 ChB RIO In3 ProcTrim Ref lt C 27 To lt 334 X ChB RIO In5 Vel Ref 2 Hi cI gt _ To lt 339 Analog In2 Proc Trim F dbk CB gt _ 0 w lt _ 340 gt Stop Owner Analog Outl 387 __ _ To lt _ 269 X Filtered Vel Fdbk Analog Out 2 C388 gt _ To lt 182 gt Computed Power Analog Out 3 389 gt _ _ To lt 264 gt Motor Current Magn F dbk Analog Out 4 390 gt _ 0 lt 265 gt Motor Volt Magn Through the SCANport interface up to five different SCANport adapters and two different remote I O RIO devices can control the 1336 FORCE With this flexibility conflicts are inherent The PLC Communications Mask Adapter Board allows you to make functional masks At each port you parameters can selectively lock out functions such as start jog and drive direction as well as many fault interlocks by using mask parameters to select the allowable functions for each port Non volatile memory Non volatile memory is data memory in the drive that retains the values of all data even when power is disconnected from the drive BRAM Battery backed Random Access Memory chips are used for the non volatile memory to store some of the drive parameters links and user text Publication 133
52. Communications Adapter Board Drive C is a 1336 FORCE drive with a PLC Communications Adapter Board Channel A of Drive C is in adapter mode Adapter D uses a 1794 ASB module to adapt the RIO image via blue hose to FLEX I O In this example two words of image are used with the 24V DC FLEX I O modules to increase discrete VO Adapter E suggests use with either a 1771 ASB module or a PLC 5 in an adapter mode for a 1 4 rack of image Drive F uses a remote I O communications GD1 module as an adapter to convert the RIO image to SCANport parameters when interfacing with a FORCE drive with a standard adapter or a 1336 PLUS drive Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 16 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter Objectives BRAM Functions Chapter 6 Parameters Chapter 6 provides information about the following e BRAM functions e parameter definitions BRAM or Battery backed up Random Access Memory also known as EEPROM is memory that is retained when the power is removed from the system User parameters link fault information reference stamp process display information and passwords are all stored in BRAM The three available BRAM functions are e BRAM Store Stores current parameter value and links to BRAM Note BRAM Jumper J3 must have a jumper on EN enable to store data to BRAM e BRAM Recall Updates the current values and links with parameter values and links stored in BRAM
53. Data Number Word 3 Text Fault Data Character 2 Character 1 Word 4 Fault Text Data Character 4 Charac Word 5 Fault Queue Entry Number Fault Text Data Character 6 Charac Word 6 Fault Text Data Character 8 Charac Word 7 Fault Text Data ter 10 Charac Word 8 Fault Text Data ter12 Character 11 Word 9 Fault Text Data Character14 Character 13 Word 10 Fault Text Data Character 16 Character 15 Word 11 a Seconds Ref Word 13 Time Clock Data Hour inute Word 14 Clock Time Data Date Day Word 15 Time Clock Data Year Month Word 16 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 22 Fault Entry Read Full Message Operation continued The Fault Queue Entry Read Full function specified in the BTW reads the contents of the fault queue for the input entry number specified in word 3 of the BTW message The response returns the fault text which you can view as ASCII text The text will have every two characters in reverse order and return a time stamp indicating the day and time the fault occurred The Clock Time is returned in the order shown in the header message You should view this information as ASCII text This field Indicates Reference am or pm where 0 is am and 1 is pm Date The date of the month in ASCII The day of the week where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Day Saturday Year The number of the year 1990 is referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would
54. Default Wane ChB RIOx Out 7 contains the eighth word or data Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 27 367 Channel A Logic Command Input Parameter Number 367 ChA Logic Cmd In Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits This logic command parameter is for Channel A Factory Default 0 Hex ChA Logic Cmd In is permanently linked to Minimum Value 0 Hex parameter 52 logic command word Maximum Value FFFF Hex File Group Communications 1 0 Logic Velocity Torque Logic Enums Bit 0 Normal Stop Bit 8 Coast Stop Bit 1 Start Bit 9 Vel Ramp Disable CBA ce Ha 000 Zero Bit2 Jog1 a n a 001 External Ref 1 par 101 100 Bit3 Clear Fault Bit 11 Process Trim 010 Preset Speed 1 par 119
55. Disable the trend Parameter Number 461 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 1 Enable the trend File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 2 Force a true trigger condition Enums 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Force Trig 462 Trend1 Status Parameter Number 462 the same rate as the data was sampled This parameter can be linked to Analog Output for example and a chart recorder connected to Analog Output to provide a hard copy of the trend data File Group Trl Status Parameter Type Read Only Non Linkable Source Display Units Drive Units None Tr1 Status identifies which state the trend is Factory Default 1 currently in The following states are possible Minimum Value 1 1 Stopped Trending is not executing amumi ane 2 ree Speeds File Group Diagnostics Trend I O 2 Running Trending is executing but the trigger point has not yet been reached Enums 1 Stopped 2 Running 3 Tripped Trigger Trending is executing and the trigger 3 Trip Trig 4 Force Trip point has been reached 4 Tripped Forced The trigger point was forced 463 Trend Output 1 Parameter Number 463 Trend Out 1 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Trend Out 1 displays the latest 500 trend input data Factory Default 0 values once the trigger condition is true and all post Minimum Value 32767 samples are gathered This parameter is updated a
56. Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 19 334 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 4 ChB RIOA In 4 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 4 scanner mode ChB RIOx In 4 contains the fifth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3340 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 335 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 5 ChB RIOA In 5 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 5 scanner mode ChB RIOx In 5 contains the sixth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table Th
57. Length 13 PLC Decimal Va 4102 Message PLC Decimal Value 4102 Trend Number Trend Status Message Length lue OK 28666 Message Error Trend Number Parameter Number Trend Sample S ize Parameter Number Post Samples Parameter Num Operator Data ber Parameter Number Sample Time Rate Parameter Number Mode Parameter Num Comparison A Parameter Num Comparison B Parameter Num Sampling Input Parameter Num Trend Output Parameter Num Message Operation ber ber ber ber ber Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Data Word 4 Data Word 5 Data Word 6 Data Word 7 Data Word 8 Data Word 9 Data Word 10 Data Word 11 Data Word 12 Data Word 13 You can use the Trend Parameter Definition function to read the list of trend parameter numbers from the database You can set up trends using the Trend Setup Data File message or by direct access through the parameter mechanism Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 76 Trend Parameter Definition The following are the valid trend numbers continued This number Specifies that the command is to be sent for 4096 Trend 1 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 Example In this example the parameter numbers for Trend 3 are read Data Format 0O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
58. Mode Sel Fault Setup Group CP FitWarn Cfg CP Warn None Cfg VP FlyWarn Cfg VP Warn None Cfg Absolute Overspd Stall Delay Mtr Overload Lim Mtr Overload Spd1 Mtr Overload Spd2 Min Overload Lmt Service F actor Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 309 235 229 228 230 231 232 233 53 86 88 87 89 90 gi 92 95 96 97 94 Drive Tune Group Autotun Diag Sel Vel Feedback Vel Desired BW Auto Tune Status Motor Inertia Total Inertia Ki Velocity Loop Kp Velocity Loop Kf Velocity Loop Vel Damp Factor Auto Tune Speed Ph Rot Cur Ref Ph Rot Freq Ref Monitor Group Filt Vel F dbk Scaled Vel Fdbk Int Torque Ref Internal Iq Ref Computed Power DC Bus Voltage Motor Volt F dbk Motor Curr Fdbk Freq Command Inv Temp Fdbk Torque Mode Stat Lim Motor Flux Enc Pos Fdbk Low Enc Pos Fdbk Hi MCB Counter FORCE user manual 256 146 43 44 234 46 139 140 141 45 41 262 263 269 147 167 168 182 268 265 264 266 270 184 fi 148 149 8 Limits Group Accel Time Decel Time Logic Options Fwd Speed Limit Rev Speed Limit Pos Mtr Cur Lmt Neg Mtr Cur Lmt Pos Mtr Tor Lmt Neg Mtr Tor Lmt Motor P ower Lmt Regen Power Lmt Di Dt Limit Min Flux Level 6 5 125 126 59 128 127 179 180 175 176 177 178 181 174 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 6 Channel A Group ChA RIO In0 322 ChA RIO In 1 323 ChA RIO In 2 324 ChA RIO In 3 32
59. N40 0 63 This message emulates the RIO block transfer functions available on the PLC Communications Adapter Board with the exception of the multiple parameter read Refer to the message structure section in Chapter 7 Block Transfer Services for details on the available messages and their use PLC 5 TYPED WRITE N40 0 63 This message emulates the RIO block transfer functions available on the PLC Communications Adapter Board Refer to the message structure section in Chapter 7 Block Transfer Services for details on the available messages and their use PLC 5 TYPED READ N70 0 499 for Trend 1 N71 0 499 for Trend 2 N72 0 499 for Trend 3 N73 0 499 for Trend 4 This message reads the trend sampled data which is the data retained when a trigger condition occurs A file of 70 corresponds to trend 1 71 to trend 2 72 to trend 3 and 73 to trend 4 The remainder of this chapter shows three rungs from a sample program for a PLC 5 15 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Rung 2 0 4 5 This rung will read parameters 100 109 when bit B3 0 is toggled from zero to one The parameter information is stored in N20 0 9 in this PLC The drive DH station ID is 11 Enable Message Command to Drive 1 B3 MESSAGE INSTRUCTION DATA MONITOR FOR CONTROL BLOCK N7 0 Communication Command PLC 5 Data Table Address Size in Elements Local R emote Remote Station Link ID Remote Link Type Local
60. O Analog Output 402 Analog Output 2 Offset Analog Out 2 Offset Analog Out 2 Offset determines the offset applied to the Analog Out 2 value after the scale factor is applied This allows you to shift the range of the analog output Parameter Number 402 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 20 Volts Maximum Value 20 Volts File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Output Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 34 403 Analog Output 2 Scale Analog Out 2 Scale Analog Out 2 Scale determines the scale factor or gain for the Analog In 2 value A 2048 value corresponds to a 10V output signal at TB21 The value sent linked to Analog Out 2 is scaled by the corresponding scale parameter before it is offset and converted to an analog signal Scale Factor Drive Units Parameter Number 403 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Factory Default 1 Minimum Value ail Maximum Value 1 File Group Communication I O Analog Output 1 32767 1 2 16383 1 4 8192 1 16 2048 404 Analog Output 3 Offset Parameter Number 404 Analog Out 3 Offset Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 Analog Out 3 Offset determines the offset applied to Factory Default 0 the Analog Out 3 value after the scale factor is Minimum Value 20 Volts applie
61. Off On Off Off 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off Off Off On Off On Off Off Off On Off On Off Off Off 1 2 Off On Off Off Off Off Off 1 2 On Off On Off On Off On Off 3 4 Off Off On On On On On On 3 4 On On On On On On On FULL Not Applicable 3 4 1 4 On On On On On Off On 1 4 3 4 On On On On On On 1 2 1 4 Off On Off On Off Off 1 2 1 4 Off On Off Off Off On 1 2 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off On On Off Off Off 1 4 Off Off Off On 1 4 On Off Off On On Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 8 Configuring the DH If you are using the DH protocol you need to set the DH station Protocol address once you have set the protocol and baud rate Use the following chart to set switches 3 through 8 on either U3 or U5 to specify the DH station address U3 or U5 Switches 3 through 8 OFF lt ONE KS 00 Of Of Of Of Of Of 40 On Off Of Of Of Of 01 Off Of Of Off Of On 4 On Of Of Off Of On 02 Of Off Of Off On Of 42 On Off Of Off On
62. On Off Off 1 2 1 4 On Off On Off Off Off Off On 1 2 1 4 1 4 On Off On Off Off On Off On 1 4 1 2 Off On On Off On Off Off Off 1 2 1 4 Off Off On Off On Off Off On 1 4 1 2 1 4 Off On On Off On Off Off On 1 4 1 2 Off On Off Off On Off On Off Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 15 Quarter 4 Quarter3 Quarter2 Quarter 1 1 4 1 2 Off Off Off On On Off On Off On Off 1 4 1 4 1 2 Off On Off On On Off Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 16 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 A address selection 2 5 All Info Allen Bradley P contacting for assistance P analog 1 0 Analog In 1 Offset parameter 6 31 Analog In 1 parameter 6 20 Analog In 1 Scale parameter 6 31 Analog In 2 Offset parameter 6 31 Analog In 2 parameter 6 20 Analog In 2 Scale parameter Analog In 3 Offset parameter Analog In 3 parameter 6 20 Analog In 3 Scale parameter 6 32 Analog In 4 Offset parameter 6 32 Analog In 4 parameter 6 21 Analog In 4 Scale parameter 6 33 Analog Out 1 Offset parameter 6 33 Analog Out 1 parameter 6 30 Analog Out 1 Scale parameter 6 33 Analog Out 2 Offset parameter 6 33 Analog Out2 parameter 6 30 Analog Out2 Scale parameter 6 34 Analog Out 3 Offset parameter 6 34 Analog Out3 parameter 6 30 Analog Out 3 Scale Analog Out 4 Offset 6 34 Analog Out 4 parameter 6 30 Analog Out 4 Scale parameter 6 35 connections TB21
63. Out5 7 Channel A 6 24 318 Data In C1 3 SCANport I O 6 14 357 ChA RIO Out6 7 Channel A 6 24 319 Data In C2 3 SCANport I O 6 14 358 ChA RIO Out7 7 Channel A 6 24 320 Data In D1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 359 ChB RIO Out0 8 Channel B 6 25 321 Data In D2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 360 ChB RIO Out1 8 Channel B 6 25 322 ChA RIO In 0 7 Channel A 6 15 361 ChB RIO Out2 8 Channel B 6 25 323 ChA RIO In 1 7 Channel A 6 15 362 ChB RIO Out3 8 Channel B 6 25 324 ChA RIO In 2 7 Channel A 6 15 363 ChB RIO Out 4 8 Channel B 6 26 325 ChA RIO In 3 7 Channel A 6 16 364 ChB RIO Out 5 8 Channel B 6 26 326 ChA RIO In 4 7 Channel A 6 16 365 ChB RIO Out 6 8 Channel B 6 26 327 ChA RIO In 5 7 Channel A 6 16 366 ChB RIO Out 7 8 Channel B 6 26 328 ChA RIO In 6 7 Channel A 6 17 367 ChA Logic Cmd In 3 SCANport 1 0 6 27 329 ChA RIO In7 7 Channel A 6 17 368 ChB Logic Cmd In 3 SCANport 1 0 6 27 330 ChB RIO In 0 8 Channel B 6 17 369 Stop Owner 5 Owners 6 27 331 ChB RIO In 1 8 Channel B 6 18 370 Dir Owner 5 Owners 6 28 332 ChB RIO In 2 8 Channel B 6 18 371 Start Owner 5 Owners 6 28 333 ChB RIO In3 8 Channel B 6 18 372 Jog 1 Owner 5 Owners 6 28 334 ChB RIO In 4 8 Channel B 6 19 373 Jog 2 Owner 5 Owners 6 28 335 ChB RIO In 5 8 Channel B 6 19 374 SetRef Owner 5 Owners 6 28 336 ChB RIO In 6 8 Channel B 6 19 l l 375 Local
64. S5555 555 S5555 5565 6Sb56566665565 56555655656 555665566 5555565666 S555555 S555555 565 55555555 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 6 Configuring the RIO Scanner Protocol U2 or U4 Switchs lt U3 or U5 Switches 1 through 8 Swe On OFF lt ON For each pair of switches NotUsed Of Off 1 4 Rack 1 2 Rack 3 4 Rack Quarter 4 Quarter 3 If you are using the RIO scanner protocol you need to follow these steps once you have set the protocol and baud rate specify the size of the rack up to one full rack to scan e set the rack configuration Chapter 3 Using Remote I O Communications provides additional information about the RIO scanner protocol Specifying Whether One Full Rack Is Being Scanned Use the following chart to set switch 8 on either U2 or U4 Is RIO scanner scanning one full rack instead of Then set portions that total a full rack If SWS to Yes On No Off If you set switch 8 to On you do not need to set the switches for U3 or US Setting the Rack Configuration To set the switches on either U3 or U5 to specify the rack configuration for RIO scanner you need to first determine how you want to set up the logical RIO rack that is the rack size s and their respective module group For example if you want RIO scanner to scan one 1 4 rack and one 1 2 rack you need to decide what the starting module groups will be for both racks 0 2
65. Sample Rate Trend 2 Sample Rate specifies the interval at which the data in the Trend In 2 parameter is sampled It iS programmable in 2 millisecond increments All values are rounded down to the nearest 2 millisecond interval Parameter Number 468 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Seconds Factory Default 0 020 Seconds Minimum Value 0 002 Seconds Maximum Value 30 Seconds File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 469 Trend 2 Post Samples Tr2 Post Samples Tr2 Post Samples specifies the number of data samples to be gathered once the trigger evaluation becomes true There is always a sample reserved for the instance when the trigger condition becomes true Parameter Number 469 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 115 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 499 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 470 Trend 2 Continuous Trigger Tr2 Cont Trigger Tr2 Cont Trigger specifies the type of trend You can choose either 0 for one shot or for continuous With a one shot trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend stops With a continuous trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend continues looking for the next occurrence of a true trigger condition Parameter Number 470 Par
66. The following terms and abbreviations are specific to this product For a complete listing of Allen Bradley terminology refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Has the following definition See Non volatile memory Configuration parameter A configuration parameter is a sink parameter whose value may be changed while the drive is in operation Configuration parameters are used to input reference and feedback information to the drive and to provide monitoring points for control signals Refer to the 1336 FORCE user manual for a description of source and sink parameters Drive units Drive units are the actual values of the parameters as stored within the drive parameter table The drive units may be converted to engineering units or to hexadecimal for display or may be displayed directly in drive units All internal values in the drive are in terms of per unit numbering Engineering units Engineering units is a label given to parameter data that specifies what units are to be used to display the parameter value Function blocks Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 A function block is a firmware subroutine that is stored in memory within the PLC Communications Adapter Board The PLC Communications Adapter Board provides 28 different function block types By combining function blocks you can customize the way your drive operates Refer to the 1336 FORCE function block programming manual
67. The number of the year 1990 is referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Month The month of the year where 1 is January and 12 is December If an error occurs in the block transfer a value of 29952 is returned in word 2 of the BTR response Example In this example a real time clock data value of Friday February 10 1995 12 00 am was written to the drive Word 2 defines the request with a value of 2817 e Word 4 defines 0 seconds e Word 5 defines 12 00 e Word 6 defines the sixth day Friday with a date of the tenth e Word 7 defines 1995 and the second month February Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW Data File N10 10 00 01 00 00 OA 06 05 02 S 1S Hr Min Date Day YAMth BTR ASCII Display Values Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 48 Run Time Accumulator Run Time Accumulator Data Read The Run Time Accumulator Data Read message provides the drive with the accumulated time for running services This information is in hours and is read only This function is typically used as a maintenance feature PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2817 Message OK 29951 Message Error Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value 2817 Accumulated Value in Hours
68. U4 and US to configure channel B Chapter 2 Starting Up provides information for setting the DIP switches RIO Configuration for Both RIO Adapter and RIO Scanner When you configure a communications channel for RIO connection the PLC Communications Adapter Board looks like a remote I O rack to an Allen Bradley PLC or a PLC Communications Adapter Board functioning as an RIO scanner Chapter 3 Using Remote I O Communications provides further information about RIO adapter and RIO scanner modes PLC Controller XXXI Shield When configured for RIO adapter communications the PLC Communications Adapter Board can Support 57 6K 115K or 230K baud communication rates at all valid module groups Be configured as a 1 4 1 2 3 4 or full T O rack Be configured to ignore PLC fault conditions and continue operating Support transfer of multiple drive parameter read or writes in a single block transfer Allow the 1336 FORCE to be connected to two PLCs in a master backup configuration which is referred to as redundant mode where drive control can be switched between two PLCs and specifies which PLC is currently in control Allow the block transfer feature to be disabled via a DIP switch setting and provide an extra word of discrete data The terminating resistors R1 and R2 in the figure below depend on the baud rate If you are using this baud rate Then you need to use
69. You should use this function when you want to monitor the current trend sampling Example In this example Trend 1 is sampling the Velocity Feedback as it is hovering around 1750 rpm The data is displayed in internal drive units 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N10 100 4092 4091 4092 4091 4091 4092 4093 4094 4094 4093 N10 110 4092 4091 4093 4094 4092 ame 7 73 Trend File The Stored File Data function allows you to read the data values in Stored File Data the stored data file buffer when the trigger condition occurs PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 35 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Data Word 4 Data Word 5 Data Word 34 Data Word 35 Message Length Header Word 1 Message Length 35 PLC Decimal Value 4101 Message OK 28667 Message Error Trend Number Data Sample 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 4101 Word 2 Trend Offset Header Number Bits 0 11 Word 3 Data Sample 2 Data Sample 31 Data Sample 32 Message Operation You can use the Stored File Data function to read the data points in the stored buffer within the drive for the specified trend file The following are the valid trend numbers Ba Specifies that the command is to be sent for 4096 Trend 1 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3
70. also indicate undesirable external operating conditions You can recover by issuing a Clear Fault command a Clear Fault Queue command a Drive Reset command or by recycling the drive power 8 5 Warning Faults A warning fault has the lowest priority of all types of faults A warning fault indicates a condition that if left uncorrected could result in a soft fault and is designed to annunciate a condition present in the system When a warning fault occurs the drive is not commanded to stop Drive operation is not affected but a fault code is entered into the fault queue reflecting the condition You can recover by initiating a Clear Fault command but this is not necessary for continued operation Configurable Faults By using parameter programming you can configure whether certain faults are reported as a soft fault a warning fault or no fault when the fault condition is present You can use parameters 425 426 430 and 431 to configure the faults when you are using RIO communications If you want the PLC Communications Adapter Board to report the fault condition as a soft fault you need to set the appropriate bit in parameter 425 for channel A or parameter 430 for channel B To have the PLC Communications Adapter Board report the fault condition as a warning you need to set the appropriate bit in parameter 426 for channel A or parameter 431 for channel B and make sure that the corresponding bit is not set in parameter 425 or 430
71. amp amp amp cfc cfc Cc clH amp amp amp C cc ec olo O O O OO O ONO O O OOO O ONO O OO On O OONO On O O O O OM ON OO OO OO ome qo S e fF fH FH fF Ho fC fC fC fC fC fC Cf Fr KH KH fF KH KH HPC fC fC fC fC fC fC Ce Se HE ESE FS LS EF YE LBAICCDCDTDCDOD CO OJDO DOO OOO O D OOOO OO OD OOOO OO Ojo OO OOOO O S Sele SS EE E amp ElS dE gc E ga G gE te u te He e e e e e te e e te eS a eS Se S amp S nl Sf Ss Qaj 00000000000000 0o ee ee ee O0 OoOo oooO O0 O O Oojo OO OO Oem eo 2 m D zjete ttt HH HE HH HE HH HE HE HE HELO GC eC eC eC ec ec Cle eC ec ec eC ec oca Cfo ec ec eC eC ec ec eS BNISCFPOCD ODDO ODO OJOD OOO OOO O D OOD OOOO OD OOOO OO OoOo OO OOOO oO Sa z Sn wn an A OF m co s c9 So tT 25 ov T 3 Z cv S SH N 22 N ow Sa 22 Sn N ac ao OG GOAN MW TON HO MIO AN MD TF IN YO WTO AN DH TNO HO TID u NM THO OHO MHI DAA N YD TFT ONO OO HX NN NNN NNNIT MMMM ADA THO HMH MPF SF FFF TF TF FN NH NH Nn Na Nn na O Oo OO Oo Oo OO OHO Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 12 RIO Rack Address DIP Switches U2 Channel A or U4 Channel B SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 DIP Switches U3 Channel A or U5 Channel B SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 70 On On On Off Off Off 71 On On On Off Off On 72 On On On Off On Off 73 On On On Off On On 74 On On On On Off Off 5 On On On On Off On 76 On On On On On Off 77 On On O
72. buffer is set up as a level detector the post sample parameter is generally set to a higher value This allows you to evaluate what happened after the trigger occurred To set the number of post samples 1 Select the Post Samples parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 459 469 479 or 489 2 Enter the number of data points to be taken after the trigger condition becomes true You can change the number of post samples while the trend is active Note If the trigger condition occurs before the pre samples can be taken the pre samples may be unreliable The pre samples are valid if the trigger does not occur in less than the pre sample time after the trend is enabled and in the continuous mode after a trigger You can use the following formula to determine the pre sample time pre sample time 500 Post Samples 1 Sample Rate Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 9 8 Setting the Buffer Type Forcing a Trigger Condition Using Cascading Trends Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Each trend can also be set up as a one shot or continuous trigger buffer When you set up a trend as one shot the trend returns to the stopped state after all post samples have been taken Even though the trend is stopped the sampled data continues to be written to the Trend Output parameter When you set up a trend as continuous the trend operation continues after the post samples have been
73. contains the second image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 316 Data Input B1 Parameter Number 316 Data In B1 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In B1 contains the third image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 14 317 Data Input B2 Data In B2 Data In B2 contains the fourth image word from the SCANport output image table Parameter Number 317 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 432767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 318 Data Input C1 Parameter Number 318 Data In C1 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In C1 contains the fifth image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 319 Data Input C2 Parameter Number 319 Data In C2 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In C2 contains the sixth image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Gr
74. data was sampled This parameter can be linked to Analog Output for example and a chart recorder connected to Analog Output to provide a hard copy of the trend data Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 473 Read Only Source None 0 32767 432767 Diagnostics Trend 1 0 474 Trend Input 3 Trend In 3 Trend In 3 specifies the data value to sample at the specified trend sample rate You should link Trend In 3 to a source parameter such as velocity torque or current for the trend to make sense Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 474 Read Write Sink Dependent on Link 0 327670 327670 Diagnostics Trend 1 0 These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rpm then Trend In 3 s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 475 Trend 3 Operand Parameter X Tr3 Opnd Parm X Tr3 Opnd Parm X specifies the first of two parameter numbers for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered link parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group
75. input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3550 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 24 356 Channel A Remote I O Output 5 Parameter Number _ 3560 ChA RIOA Out5 adapter mode cei a eon EAE ChA B RIOA Out5 adapter mode with redundancy rae a Wve unils oe ChA RIOS Out5 scanner mode Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 ChA RIOx Out 5 contains the sixth word or data group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link
76. inputs and provides two output values the XOR of those values and the NOT of the output value FILTER A first order low pass algorithm filter with a programmable bandwidth in tenths of radians per second 4AND An AND function that takes four inputs and performs a logical AND 40R An OR function that takes the logical OR of four inputs FUNCTION A function that takes a user approximation for a function and linearly interpolates between two of five possible points INTEGRATOR An integrator function block that does trapezoidal integration LIMIT A limiter function block that limits an input to programmed minimum and maximum values LNOT A logical NOT function MINMAX A minimum or maximum function block that you can program to take the minimum or maximum of two input values MONOSTABLE A one shot monostable function block that elongates a rising edge signal for a specified time duration MULTIPLEXER A select function block that multiplexes one of four inputs based on the state of the selector inputs MULTIPLY A multiply function block that multiplies two signed integers NO OP A PLC space holder PI CTRL A proportional integral control function block that takes the difference between two inputs and performs a PI control with a proportional and integral gains PULSE CNTR A pulse counter function block that counts rising edges of an input value RATE LIMITER A ramp function block that limits the rate of change of an input value SCALE A s
77. is used Enums Bit3 Bit2 Bit BitO0 Enums Warning Rck Fit Grp0 ChB GO Rack Fit Fit 36031 Rck Flt Grp2 ChB G2 Rack Fit Fit 36032 Rck Fit Grp4 ChB G4 Rack Fit Fit 36033 Rck Fit Grp6 ChB G6 Rack Fit Fit 36034 440 SCANport Fault Selection Parameter Number 440 SP Fault Sel Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits SP Fault Sel indicates which ports will cause a drive Factory Default 0011 1110 soft fault on loss of communications Minimum Value 0000 0000 Maximum Value 0011 1110 File Group Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select S tatus Enums Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Enums Fault Port1 SP Ptl Timeout F It 26038 Port2 SP Pt2 Timeout F It 26039 Port3 SP Pt3 Timeout F It 26040 Port 4 SP Pt4 Timeout Flt 26041 Port5 SP Pt5 Timeout F It 26042 441 SCANport Warning Selection Parameter Number 441 SP Warn Sel Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits SP Warn Sel indicates which ports will cause a drive Factory Default 0011 1110 warning on loss of communications Minimum Value 0000 0000 Maximum Value 0011 1110 File Group Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select S tatus Enums Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Enums Warning Poren SP Ptl Timeout F It 26038 Port2 SP Pt2 Timeout F It 26039 Port3 SP Pt3 Timeout F It 26040 Port 4 SP Pt4 Timeout F It 26041 Port5 SP Pt Timeout Fit 26042 Publication 1336 F
78. malfunction Communications loss or LED off D12 and D15 on None None A PLC or RIO scanner LED has the rack inhibited or All devices in the scan Duplicate node on DH blinking the PLC is in Reset list are faulted link Program Test mode DIO and LED on None None Normal Di D14 communications Yellow 7 PLC Communications EER None pone Adapter Board faulted LED None None No communications blinking over DH D12 and Normal PLC controller All devices in the scan LED on an None D15 communications list are operational Green No communications to No communications to LED off PLC control or D8 and PLC control or D8 and None D13 on D13 on At least one device on the PLC in Reset Program scan list is faulted For LED blinkin Test mode or PLC has example if you turn one None rack inhibited half rack off this light blinks Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 4 Fault Queues Faults Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 All faults that have occurred are shown in the fault queue Each entry shows the type of fault and the time and date that the fault occurred The fault information stays in BRAM until you clear the queue by using the Clear Fault Queue command You cannot clear the queue by issuing either a Clear Fault or a Drive Reset command or by recycling the drive power The fault queue may contain up to 32 faults The following information is provided for each fault listed in t
79. operation The typical digital input connections when using an external power source can be shown as follows TB20 INPUT COM DIGITAL COMMON EXT FAULT DIGITAL IN EXTERNAL FAULT NORM STOP DIGITAL IN a o COMMON o 115V AC 24VDC HIGH STOP MOTOR THERMO DIGITAL IN MOTOR THERMO DRIVE ENABLE DIGITAL IN The following are the signals that may be used This signal DRIVE ENABLE Has the following meaning A drive enable signal must be present before the drive will acknowledge a start command If LED D11 drive enable on the PLC Communications Adapter Board is illuminated the drive has received an enable signal allowing drive logic to accept a start command MOTOR THERMO A motor thermo signal allows you to connect an NC motor thermal switch to the 1336 FORCE Motor Thermo LED D9 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board illuminates if a motor over temperature condition occurs The drive issues a fault or warning based on the fault configuration defined by VP Fault Select parameter 88 and VP Warn Select parameter 89 ATTENTION The drive start stop control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit is required to remove ac line power to the drive When you remove ac input power there is loss of inherent regenerative braking eff
80. size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 20 337 Channel B Remote I O Input 7 Parameter Number 3370 ChB RIOA In 7 adapter mode eee ee spit Read Only es isplay Units Drive Units one ChB RIOS In 7 scanner mode Factory Default Nane ChB RIOx In 7 contains the eighth word or data Minimum Value 32767 group from the PLC controller output image table Maximum Value 32767 The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also Board can use this value directly Other drive depends on the selected rack size functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 338 SCANport Analog Input Parameter Number 338 SP Analog In Parameter Type Read Only Sink Display Units Drive Units None SP Analog In converts a 10V analog input value to Factory Default None a 32767 value You can then link this digital value Minimum Value 32767 to one of the 1336 FORCE input paramet
81. taken When a new trigger condition occurs the previous data samples are overwritten To set the buffer type 1 Select the Trend Continuous Trigger parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 460 470 480 or 490 2 Select 0 if you want to perform a one shot operation or 1 if you want the trending to be continuous You can change the buffer type while the trend is active For a continuous trend when the trigger condition becomes true and after the post samples are gathered there is a period of time when samples are not being taken Trending uses this time period to do some internal housekeeping At times you may want to force a trigger condition The trend operation will start taking post samples even though the programmed trigger condition has not been met To force a trigger condition 1 Select the Trend Select parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 461 471 481 or 491 2 Select a value of 2 to force the trigger 3 When all post samples are gathered the Trend Select parameter is changed to Disable for one shot or Enable for continuous By using cascading trends you can collect more than 500 data points A cascading trend refers to the method of having one trend set to trigger when another trend either triggers or is forced The second trend then starts collecting data points as soon as the first trend finishes collecting its post samples Looking at the Results of the Trend T
82. using the trend parameters you can monitor up to four parameters trend 1 through trend 4 When trending is enabled or running data points or samples are taken and stored in a circular buffer for the parameter linked to the Trend Input parameter The PLC Communications Adapter Board continues to take data points until it either reaches a trigger point or a trigger is forced A number of data points called post samples are then taken once the trend is triggered When complete the data in the circular buffer is copied and ordered from oldest to newest in a secondary buffer This buffer is then available for viewing as long as power is applied until another trigger condition occurs continuous mode a BRAM recall initialize is executed or the system is reset Within this process you determine e the parameter s you want to monitor the rate at which you want the data sampled the trigger point the number of samples taken after the trigger point has been reached whether you want a single trend to be performed or continuous trending The trending operation has four associated states When a trend is in this state Then No data samples are being taken and Trend Stopped Output contains the data samples that have been taken for the previous trend The trigger condition has not been reached and data samples are being taken at the specified rate Trend Input contains the data samples Runni unning fr
83. values Reset the drive If the fault persists SW Malfunction Hard The integrity check on the board you may have to replace either the 24013 software has failed PLC Communications Adapter Board or the main control board Reset the drive If the fault persists SW Malfunction Hard The integrity check on the board you may have to replace either the 24014 software has failed PLC Communications Adapter Board or the main control board SW Malfunction The integrity check on the board oo eee rs es Hard replace the PLC Communications 24015 software has failed Adapter Board SW Malfunction The integrity check on the board PEA MEUN Ue an eee Hard replace the PLC Communications 24016 software has failed Adapter Board SW Malfunction The integrity check on the board Bese te deve If the sae P es Hard replace the PLC Communications 24017 software has failed Adapter Board SW Malfunction The integrity check on the board Rosni He dine E raui P ee Hard replace the PLC Communications 24018 software has failed Adapter Board AP SW LM Rev a Communications Adapter Board Verify the board software and language Err Soft 24025 software language module module versions with Allen Bradley mismatch Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 8 Fault text and Fault code Ge Description Suggested action The PLC Communications Adapter Config Adapter Board has detected that Veri
84. will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 466 Trend 2 Operand Parameter Y Tr2 Opnd Parm Y Tr2 Opnd Parm Y specifies the second of two parameter numbers used for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered link parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter Number 466 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 327670 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rom then Tr2 Opnd Parm Y s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 467 Trend 2 Operator Tr2 Operator Tr2 Operator specifies the operator used for the trend trigger evaluation The available operators are Value Description 1 Greater Than GT 2 Less Than LT 3 Equals LEQ 4 Not E quals CNE 5 Logical AND AND 6 Logical NAND NAND 7 Logical OR COR 8 Logical NOR NOR Parameter Number 467 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 5 Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 8 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 50 468 Trend 2 Sample Rate Tr2
85. 1 4 rack the first group in the rack is 0 2 4 or 6 Module The module number associated with the block transfer in the associated slot This is always 0 Control Block The control block which is a pre defined set of words that contain bit information associated with the PLC block transfer functions In the PLC 5 15 and 5 25 the control block requires five contiguous words In the PLC 5 15 and 5 25 example words N111 0 through N111 4 are reserved for the bit array in the BTW block and words N111 90 through N111 94 are reserved for the BTR block In the PLC 5 40 and 5 60 the control block may be either an integer type and require five contiguous words or a block transfer type and require one element as shown in the previous figure Data File The address of the message sent by the BTW or received by the BTR block The data file contains both header and data information The number of words required for the data file depends on the type of message being sent In the PLC 5 15 and 5 25 example N111 5 is the first word in the data file for the BTW block and N111 50 is the first word for the BTR block Refer to the message description section in Chapter 7 Block Transfer Services for the header and data that must be included in the data file Length The length of the block transfer message in words This length depends on the message being sent The BTW and BTR instruction lengths may be different Refer t
86. 1 Trend In 1 454 9 Trends 6 46 SP Comm Retries 302 1 Adapter Info 6 12 Trend In 2 464 9 Trends 6 49 SP Default Ref 416 3 Velocity Ref 6 37 Trend In 3 474 9 Trends 6 51 SP Fault Sel 440 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 Trend In 4 484 9 Trends 6 53 SP Fault Sts 442 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 46 Trend Out 1 463 9 Trends 6 48 SP Warn Sel 441 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 Trend Out 2 473 9 Trends 6 51 SP Warn Sts 443 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 46 Trend Out 3 483 9 Trends 6 53 Start Mask 410 4 Masks 6 35 Trend Out 4 493 9 Trends 6 56 Start Owner 371 5 Owners 6 28 Trim Owner 377 4 Owners 6 29 Stop Owner 369 5 Owners 6 27 Parameters included in Groups 7 and 8 depend on the selected communications Shaded parameters do not exist when DH is selected Inputs are variable and depend on rack size and whether block transfer is enabled Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 10 PLC Communications The following charts are designed to be used as reference for setting Adapter Board DIP Switch and checking your DIP switches Refer to the appropriate chart for Settings the protocol you are using RIO Adapter With or Without Block Transfer DIP Switches U2 Channel A or U4 Channel B DIP Switches U3 Channel A or U5 Channel B SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Protocol RIO w oBlock Transfer Off Off RIO w Block Transfer Off On
87. 1 for Trend Continuous Trigger to specify that a one shot operation is to be performed Link the Trend Output parameter to the Analog Output parameter Chapter Objectives Specifications Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplementals Information Chapter 10 provides specifications and supplemental information including a parameter cross reference by number or name parameter block diagrams a hardware block diagram and PLC Communications Adapter Board DIP switch settings The following table shows the specifications for the PLC Communications Adapter Board This category Environmental Has these specifications Operating temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Storage temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Relative humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11 ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 15 mm 0 006 inches displacement 1G peak Electrical Input voltage supplied by drive Input frequency NA Input current NA SCANport load 60 mA Vibration 0 15 mm 0 006 inches displacement 1G peak Communications Drive side SCANport peripheral interface PLC side Allen Bradley RIO DH Baud rate 57 6K 115 2K or 230 4K Rack size 1 4 1 2 3 4 or full Product Compatibility The PLC Communications Adapter Board is designed to be used with the following terminal interface devices TIDs Drive Tools Allen Bradley Programmable Cont
88. 11 1111 left represent block U2 and the two groups on the File Group Diagnostics Info right represent block U3 304 Channel B DIP Switch Parameter Number 304 ChB DIP Switch Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits ChB DIP Switch displays the current DIP switch Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 settings for Channel B of the PLC Communications Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Adapter Board The two groups of numbers on the Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111 left represent block U4 and the two groups on the File Group Diagnostics Info right represent block U5 305 Channel A LED State Parameter Number 305 ChA LED State Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None ChA LED State displays the current LED state for Factory Default 0 channel A The LED states correspond to LEDs D8 Minimum Value 0 D10 and D12 on the PLC Communications Adapter Maximum Value 5 Board File Group Diagnostics Info Enums 0 Off 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 Flash Green 5 Flash Red Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 13 306 Channel B LED State Parameter Number 306 ChB LED State Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None ChB LED State displays the current LED state for Factory Default 0 channel B The LED states correspond to LEDs Minimum Value 0 D13 D14 and D15 on the PLC Communications Maximum Value 5 Adapter Board File Group Diag
89. 1336 FORCE consists of parameter 56 Logic Status LOW and parameter 146 Velocity Feedback Based on the links shown the 16 bit input word for group 1 rack 2 in the PLC controller is a 16 bit logic status word The description for parameter 56 defines the bits in this 16 bit word In addition the 16 bit input for group 2 rack 2 in the PLC controller is a 16 bit signed integer whose value corresponds to the allowable values in drive units for parameter 146 Scaling If the PLC controller is to manipulate the data transferred between the 1336 FORCE and the PLC controller in units other than drive units the data must be appropriately scaled when it is transferred to a drive parameter You can do the scaling either at the PLC controller or by using drive function blocks The scaled information must be based on drive unit definitions for parameters in the 1336 FORCE Parameter 101 Velocity Reference 1 HI shown in the previous figure is in drive units where 4096 is defined as base speed If the PLC controller program is written in terms of feet per minute fpm then you need to convert fpm to drive units before sending it to parameter 101 Discrete I O Program Example A PLC controller program is shown on the next page You could use this example to control the 1336 FORCE Based on the configuration shown in the previous figure the PLC controller program transfers information to parameters 367 and 101 in the 1336 FORCE Logic bits
90. 2 Par 3 Data Out B1 Par 3 Data Out B2 Par 3 Data Out C1 Par 3 Data Out C2 Par 3 Data Out D1 Par 3 Data Out D2 Par 3 SP Analog Out Par 386 Data Out A1 Par 343 SCANports 1 2 3 4 5 SP Fault Status Par 422 SP Warning Status P ar 443 SCANport Image Out 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Logic Command Word Par 52 Port Enable Mask Par 408 s Local Mask Par 415 fs Start Mask Par 410 gt B Jog Mask Par 411 gt B Clear Fault Mask Par 413 B Direction Mask P ar 409 No Change External Ref 1 PresetSpeed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 External Ref 2 o v v w v wW ss SCANport Default Reference P ar 416 Reference Mask Par 412 B Reset Drive Mask Par 414 B w Stop Owner Par 369 Direction Owner P ar 370 Start Owner P ar 371 Jogi Owner Par 372 Jog2 Owner Par 373 Set Reference Owner Par 374 Local Owner Par 375 Flux Owner P ar 376 Trim Owner Par 377 Ramp Owner P ar 378 Clear Fault Owner Par 379 Permanent Link it0 Ramp Stop it1 Start it2 Jogl it3 Clear Fault it4 Forward it5 Reverse it6 Jog2 it7 Current Limit S top it8 Coast to Stop it9 Velocity Ramp Disable it 10 Flux Enable Magnetizing Flux it 11 Process Trim Enable it 12 Velocity Reference Select A it 13 Velocity Reference Select B it 14 Velocity Refer
91. 2 Error BT ERROR BTU Error Counter 1 020 CTU Count Up Counter C11 0 CU Preset 32767 Accum DN Rung 2 3 EndofFile The following are additional notes regarding block transfer programming e You can set up a block transfer subroutine to transfer information when you need to perform multiple functions or when you need to transfer more data than a single BT W BTR pair can handle If you use a block transfer subroutine you need to carefully sequence the block transfers so that one BTW and one BTR occur for each portion of the sequence e The status bits from the BTW and BTR control files EN DN and ER may change at any time during a program scan If your program uses these status bits you should copy them to a file and use the copied versions in your program Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 18 Using RIO Redundant Mode Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 When you configure both channel A and channel B for RIO communications you need to decide whether both channels will act independently or if one channel will act as a back up for the other channel which is referred to as RIO redundant mode If you want both channels to act independently set both channels to RIO communications but do not set the DIP switch settings for the redundant mode By using RIO redundant mode you can connect the drive to the RIO channel of two separate PLC controllers Parameter 427 specifies which PLC controller ch
92. 3 September 1998 The following figure shows the RIO 1 2 rack configuration With each configuration the starting group module 0 2 or 4 is reserved for block transfer if you select RIO with the block transfer protocol Starting Group 2 Module Group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Starting Group 0 Starting Group 4 The following figure shows the RIO 1 4 rack configuration With each configurations the starting group module 0 2 4 or 6 is reserved for block transfer if you select RIO with the block transfer protocol Starting Group 2 Starting Group 6 Module Group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Starting Group 0 Starting Group 4 3 5 The following figure shows an example of the PLC Communications Adapter Board that uses RIO communications with block transfer Notice that the first module group number is reserved for block transfer PLC Controller Output Image Table Group Number Full 34 m WA 0 0 2 0 2 4 0 2 4 6 1 We 13 1 3 5 7 2 2 4 2 4 6 3 3 5 3 5 7 4 4 6 5 5 7 6 7 Input Image Table Group Number Full 3 12 1 4 0 0 2 0 2 4 0 2 4 6 il We 13 1 3 5 7 2 2 4 2 4 6 3 3 5 35 1 4 4 6 5 5 7 6 7 1336 FORCE PLC Communications Adapter Board C hannel B Drive P di Parameters eserved for A 330 Block Transfer 9 SD 2 KD a EED User TIP Configurable k nn ia 336 gt Se en _D E c
93. 3 refer to your PLC Control Manual The following figure shows the block transfer instructions used for PLC 5 15 and 5 25 s BTW BTR Block Transfer Write EN Block Transfer Read EN Rack Rack Group DN Group DN Module Module Control Block N111 0 ER Control Block N111 90 ER Data File N111 5 Data File N111 50 Length 20 Length 24 Continuous N Continuous N 3 13 The following figure shows the block transfer instructions used for PLC 5 40 and 5 60 s BTW Block Transfer Write EN Rack Group DN Module Control Block BT112 0 ER Data File N117 0 Length 6 Continuous N BTR Block Transfer Read EN Rack Group DN Module Control Block BT112 1 ER Data File N117 100 Length 8 Continuous N Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 14 The components of the block transfer instructions are This component Rack Specifies The rack number The RIO switch settings on the PLC Communications Adapter Board determine the rack number Group The group number of the first group in the rack associated with the PLC Communications Adapter Board In the PLC 5 15 and 5 25 example the rack has been set up as a full eight group rack Therefore the first group is 0 If you select a 1 2 rack the first group in the rack is 0 2 or 4 If you select a
94. 351 ChA RIO Out 0 7 Channel A 6 22 309 Language Sel 1 Adapter Info 6 13 352 ChA RIO Out 1 7 Channel A 6 22 314 Data In A1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 353 ChA RIO Out2 7 Channel A 6 23 315 Data In A2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 354 ChA RIO Out3 7 Channel A 6 23 316 Data In B1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 355 ChA RIO Out4 7 Channel A 6 23 317 Data In B2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 356 ChA RIO Out5 7 Channel A 6 24 318 Data In C1 3 SCANport I O 6 14 357 ChA RIO Out6 7 Channel A 6 24 319 Data In C2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 358 ChA RIO Out7 7 Channel A 6 24 320 Data In D1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 359 ChB RIO Out0 8 Channel B 6 25 321 Data In D2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 14 360 ChB RIO Out1 8 Channel B 6 25 322 ChA RIO In 0 7 Channel A 6 15 361 ChB RIO Out 2 8 Channel B 6 25 323 ChA RIO In1 7 Channel A 6 15 362 ChB RIO Out 3 8 Channel B 6 25 324 ChA RIO In 2 7 Channel A 6 15 363 ChB RIO Out 4 8 Channel B 6 26 325 ChA RIO In 3 7 Channel A 6 16 364 ChB RIO Out 5 8 Channel B 6 26 326 ChA RIO In 4 7 Channel A 6 16 365 ChB RIO Out 6 8 Channel B 6 26 327 ChA RIO In 5 7 Channel A 6 16 366 ChB RIO Out 7 8 Channel B 6 26 328 ChA RIO In 6 7 Channel A 6 17 367 ChA Logic Cmd In 3 SCANport I O 6 27 329 ChA RIO In 7 7 Channel A 6 17 368 ChB Logic Cmd In 3 SCANport 1 0 6 27 330 ChB RIO In 0 8 Channel B 6 17 369 Stop Owner 5 Owners 6 27 331 ChB R
95. 37 351 366 425 431 Transferring Data Using Discrete Data Transfer Parameter 427 is defined only if channel A is set up for RIO scanner mode Parameter 432 is defined only if channel B is set up for RIO scanner mode Parameter 427 is defined only if the redundant DIP switch is set and both channels have the same RIO adapter protocol and the same rack size The drive requires that some data be continuously updated This data is transferred using the PLC controller s I O image table This data is transferred from the drive to the PLC Communications Adapter Board every 1 5 milliseconds The following table shows the timing information for discrete data transfer from the PLC Communications Adapter Board to the drive If you are transferring data at The fastest the transfer can this baud rate occur is 57 6K 7 2 milliseconds 115 2K 3 6 milliseconds 230 4K 1 8 milliseconds Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 When you use discrete data transfer you need to specify a rack size With the PLC Communications Adapter Board you can specify a 1 4 rack a 1 2 rack a 3 4 rack or a full rack The first group number associated with a rack is reserved for the block transfer function if it is selected with the RIO protocol you should select the RIO protocol through DIP switches set up on the PLC Communications Adapter Board 3 3 The remaining group numbers are used for transferring disc
96. 4 484 463 413 483 493 Trend Setup r1 Opnd Parm X r1 Opnd Parm Y rl Operator rl Sample Rate r1 Post Samples r1 Cont Trigger rl Select Tr2 Opnd Parm X Tr2 Opnd Parm Y Tr2 Operator Tr2 Sample Rate Tr2 Post Samples Tr2 Cont Trigger Tr2 Select Tr3 Opnd Parm X Tr3 Opnd Parm Y Tr3 Operator r3 Sample Rate Tr3 Post Samples Tr3 Cont Trigger Tr3 Select Tr4 Opnd Parm X Tr4 Opnd Parm Y Tr4 Operator Tr4 Sample Rate Tr4 Post Samples Tr4 Cont Trigger Tr4 Select 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 Info Drive SW Version Drive Type Base Drive Curr Base Line Volt Adapter Version Adapter ID Language Sel SP Comm Retries PLC Comm Status ChA LED State DIP Switch ChA ChB LED State DIP Switch ChB DIP FaultS etup z Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 FORCE user manual Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 220 221 301 300 309 302 307 305 303 306 304 435 Parameter Conventions 6 11 The remainder of this chapter describes the parameters associated with the PLC Communications Adapter Board For parameters not listed in this section refer to the parameter descriptions in your 1336 FORCE user manual Parameter descriptions adhere to the following conventions Par Parameter Name Parameter description Parameter Number Parameter Type Read Only or Rea
97. 4 or 6 The DIP switches for the rack configuration work as pairs One pair of switches designates a 1 4 rack If you use a 1 2 rack you need to use two pairs of switches or four switches Likewise if you use a 3 4 rack you need to use three pairs of switches or six switches Use the following chart to set the DIP switches for your specific configuration Quarter 4 through quarter 1 represent the quarter racks that make up one full rack DIP Switches U3 or U5 Off Off Off Off Off Off Quarter 2 Quarter 1 1 4 Off On 1 4 Off Off Off Off Off On Off Off 1 4 Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off 1 4 Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off Off Off On Off On 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off On Off Off Off On 1 4 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 1 4 Off On Off Off Off Off Off On Quarter 4 Quarter 3 1 4 Quarter 2 1 4 Quarter 1 DIP Switches U3 or U5 Off Off Off On Off On Off 2 7 Off 1 4 1 4 Off On Off Off Off On Off Off 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off Off Off Off 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off Off Off On Off On Off On 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off Off Off On Off On 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On Off Off Off On 1 4 1 4 1 4 Off On Off On
98. 487 Tr4 Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 54 436 ChA Fault Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 43 488 Tr4 Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 54 437 ChA Warn Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 44 489 Tr4 Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 55 438 ChB Fault Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 44 490 Tr4 Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 55 439 ChB Warn Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 491 Tr4 Select 9 Trend Setup 6 55 440 SP FaultSel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 492 Tr4 Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 55 441 SP Warn Sel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 493 Trend Out 4 9 Trend 1 0 6 56 442 SP Fault Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 46 Parameters included in Groups 7 and 8 depend on the selected communications gt enabled Shaded parameters do not exist when DH is selected Inputs are variable and depend on rack size and whether block transfer is Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 8 Parameter Cross The following table lists the parameters alphabetically Reference By Name Name No Group Page Name No Group Page Adapter ID 300 1 Adapter Info 6 12 ChA RIO Out 0 351 7 Channel A 6 22 Adapter Version 301 1 Adapter Info 6 12 ChA RIO Out 1 352 7 Channel A 6 22 An In 1 Offset 392 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 ChA RIO Out2 353 7 Channel A 6 23 An In 1 Scale 3
99. 5 ChA RIO In 4 326 ChA RIO In 5 327 ChA RIO In 6 328 ChA RIO In 7 329 ChA RIO Out 0 351 ChA RIO Out 1 352 ChA RIO Out 2 353 ChA RIO Out 3 354 ChA RIO Out 4 355 ChA RIO Out5 356 ChA RIO Out 6 357 ChA RIO Out7 358 Redund Chan 427 Drv Drv D2D Tsk Interval 9 D2D Baud Rate 10 D2D Xmit Addr ll D2D Xmit Ind 1 14 D2D Xmit Data 1 20 D2D Xmit Ind 2 15 D2D Xmit Data 2 21 D2D Rev 1 Addr 12 D2D Rev 1 Indl 16 D2D Rcv 1 Data 1 22 D2D Rev 1 Ind 2 17 D2D Rev 2 Data 2 23 D2D Rev 2 Addr 13 D2D Rev 2 Ind 1 18 D2D Rev 2 Data 1 24 D2D Rev 2 Ind 2 19 D2D Rev 2 Data 2 25 Channel B Group ChB RIO In 0 ChB RIO In 1 ChB RIO In 2 ChB RIO In 3 ChB RIO In 4 ChB RIO In 5 ChB RIO In 6 ChB RIO In 7 ChB RIO Out 0 ChB RIO Out 1 ChB RIO Out 2 ChB RIO Out 3 ChB RIO Out 4 ChB RIO Out 5 ChB RIO Out 6 ChB RIO Out7 Fault Sel Sts ChA Fault Sts ChA Warn Sts ChB Fault Sts ChB Warn Sts SP Fault Sts SP Warn Sts SP Fault Sel SP Warn Sel ChA Flt Sel ChA Warn Sel ChB Fit Sel ChB Warn Sel CP Fit Status VP Fit Status CP Warn Status VP Warn Status CP FitWarn Cfg CP Warn None Cfg VP FlyWarn Cfg VP Warn None Cfg Nofig Fit Status Pwrup Fit Status Max DB Power Max DB Temp DB Time Const 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 436 437 438 439 442 443 440 441 425 426 430 431 82 83 85 86 87 88 89 Logic Group ChA Logic Cmd In 367 ChB Logic Cmd In 368 Logic Command 52
100. 6 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 This term Has the following definition The PLC Communications Adapter Board allows one or more control devices or adapters to own start jog direction and other control functions To avoid conflict some owners are exclusive For example Owner only one device can issue a forward direction speed command Others parameters have multiple control For example all devices can jog the drive in the forward direction but only at a set speed Devices can for example jog the drive in the forward direction only if the jog mask parameter allows for it A parameter entry refers to the information stored in the drive that Parameter ente contains the parameter number parameter data and all other information related to the specific parameter Parameter table A parameter table is a table of parameter entries for all configuration sink and source parameters in the drive Per unit numbering is a numbering system that defines a specific Per unit numeric value as representing 100 of a particular quantity being numbering measured The number 4096 is used in many places in the drive to represent one per unit Sink Sink parameters accept data from other parameters The drive then uses parameters this data to perform the desired functions An example of a sink Read and parameter is the external velocity reference parameter that accepts a Write speed reference from a device such as a PLC
101. 6 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Time Stamp Reference Time Stamp Data Write 7 53 The Reference Time Stamp message is provided to allow the drive to write the specified real time clock This allows the drive to write a new reference stamp PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 7 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 7 PLC Decimal Value 29952 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2816 Message OK 29952 Message Error Clock Time Seconds 10ths of MS Time Clock Hour inute Clock Time Date Day Time Clock Year Month Message Operation The Reference Time Stamp Data Write allows you to define a specific time stamp to be used in the drive The Time is based on a 24 hour clock This field Indicates Seconds The seconds and tenths of milliseconds Date The date of the month in ASCII The day of the week where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Day Saturday Year The number of the year 1990 is referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Month The month of the year where 1 is January and 12 is December Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 54 Reference Time Stamp Data Example Write continued This example has defined the Reference Time Stamp as Friday February 10 1995 The Hour of 0 indicates a starting time of 10
102. 7 Trend 1 Post Samples 6 47 Trend 1 Sample Rate 6 47 Trend 1 Select Trend 1 Status E Trend 2 Continuous Trigger 6 50 Trend 2 Operand Parameter X 6 49 Trend 2 Operand Parameter Y 6 49 Trend 2 Operator 6 49 Trend 2 Post Samples 6 50 Trend 2 Sample Rate 6 50 Trend 2 Select 6 50 Trend 2 Status Trend 3 Continuous Trigger 6 52 Trend 3 Operand Parameter X Trend 3 Operand Parameter Y Trend 3 Operator 6 52 Trend 3 Post Samples 6 52 Trend 3 Sample Rate Trend 3 Select 6 53 Trend 3 Status Trend 4 Continuous Trigger 6 55 Trend 4 Operand Parameter X Trend 4 Operand Parameter Y Trend 4 Operator 6 54 Trend 4 Post Samples 6 55 Trend 4 Sample Rate Trend 4 Select 6 55 Trend 4 Status 6 55 Trend Input 1 6 Trend Input 2 6 49 Trend Hae wae Trend Input 4 6 53 Trend Output 1 6 48 Trend Output 2 Trend Output 3 Trend Output 4 Trim Owner 6 29 PLC Communications Adapter Board displaying the current firmware version 6 12 example of system communications photograph rate of discrete data transfer to drive RIO status word 3 10 selecting board language 6 13 status parameter 6 13 troubleshooting 8 14 8 15 using system resources post samples for trends 9 7 protocol selection 2 4 publications related P 4 R rack allocation rack size selection 2 4 Real Time Clock Data Read Real Time Clock Data Write redundant See RIO redundant mode Reference Ti
103. 7 0 15 5 10 File Temp Toggle Bit Drive 1 Parameter Read MSG SEND REC MESSAGE Control Block N7 0 4 7 Rung 2 2 This rung will write parameters 117 123 when bit B3 1 is toggled from zero to one The parameter values to be sent to the drive are stored in N30 0 7 Drive 1 Enable Message Write Parameter Write from Drive 1 B3 MSG SEND REC MESSAGE Control Block N7 20 End of File No More Files MESSAGE INSTRUCTION DATA MONITOR FOR CONTROL BLOCK N7 0 Communication Command PLC 5 TYPED WRITE PLC 5 Data Table Address N30 0 Ignore if timed out Size in Elements 7 to be retried Local R emote LOCAL awaiting execution Remote Station IA continuous Link ID N A error Remote Link Type N A message done Local Node Address 11 message transmitting Destination Data Table Address N10 117 message enabled control bit addr N7 20 15 ERROR CODE BLOCK SIZE 10 WORDS Press a function key to change a value gt Rem Prog Forces None Data Formatted 5 10 File Temp Size in Toggle Elements Bit Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 4 8 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter Objectives Using the SCANport Capabilities Chapter 5 Understanding the Resources of Your Drive Chapter 5 provides information about using the resources that are available with your drive The following topics are covered in this chapter e understanding the SCANport logic control a
104. 9 Analog In 4 342 6 Analog I O 6 21 ChB RIO In6 336 8 Channel B 6 19 Analog Out 1 387 6 Analog I O 6 30 ChB RIO In7 337 8 Channel B 6 20 Analog Out 2 388 6 Analog I O 6 30 ChB RIO Out 0 359 8 Channel B 6 25 Analog Out 3 389 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 ChB RIO Out1 360 8 Channel B 6 25 Analog Out 4 390 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 ChB RIO Out2 361 8 Channel B 6 25 ChA DIP Switch 303 7 Channel A 6 12 ChB RIO Out3 362 8 Channel B 6 25 ChA Fault Sts 436 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 43 ChB RIO Out 4 363 8 Channel B 6 26 ChA LED State 305 7 Channel A 6 12 ChB RIO Out5 364 8 Channel B 6 26 ChA Logic Cmd In 367 3 SCANport 1 0 6 27 ChB RIO Out 6 365 8 Channel B 6 26 ChA RIO Fit Sel 425 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 38 ChB RIO Out7 366 8 Channel B 6 26 ChA RIO In 0 322 7 ChannelA 6 15 l ChB RIO Warn Sel 431 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 42 ChA RIO In 1 323 7 Channel A 6 15 ChB RIOS Retries 432 8 Channel B 6 43 ChA RIO In 2 324 7 Channel A 6 15 ChB Warn Sts 439 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 ChA RIO In 3 325 7 Channel A 6 16 Cir Fault Mask 413 4 Masks 6 36 ChA RIO In 4 326 7 Channel A 6 16 CirFitOwner 379 5 Owners 6 29 ChA RIO In 5 327 7 Channel A 6 16 Data inal 314 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 ChA RIO In 6 328 7 Channel A 6 17 Data In A2 315 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13 ChA RIO In 7 329 7 Channel A 6 17 Data In B1 316 3 SCANport 1 0 6 13
105. 93 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 ChA RIO Out3 354 7 Channel A 6 23 An In 2 Offset 394 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 ChARIO Out4 355 7 Channel A 6 23 An In 2 Scale 395 6 Analog I O 6 32 l ChA RIO Out 5 356 7 Channel A 6 24 An In 3 Offset 396 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 ChARIO Out 357 7 Channel A 6 24 An In 3 Scale 397 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 ChARIO Out7 358 7 Channel A 6 24 An In 4 Offset 398 6 Analog 1 0 6 32 ChA RIO Warn Sel 426 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 32 An In 4 Scale 399 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 ChA Warn Sts 437 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 44 An Out 1 Offset 400 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 ChB DIP Switch 304 8 Channel B 6 12 An Out 1 Scale 401 6 Analog 1 0 6 33 ChB Fault Sts 438 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 44 An Out 2 Offset 402 6 Analog I O 6 33 ChB LED State 306 8 Channel B 6 13 An Out 2 Scale 403 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 ChB Logic Cmd In 368 3 SCANport 1 0 6 27 An Out 3 Offset 404 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 ChB RIO Fit Sel 430 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 41 An Out 3 Scale 405 6 Analog I O 6 34 ChB RIO In 0 330 8 Channel B 6 17 An Out 4 Offset 406 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 ChB RIO In1 331 8 Channel B 6 18 An Out4 Scale 407 6 Analog 1 0 6 35 ChB RIO In 2 332 8 Channel B 6 18 Analog In 1 339 6 Analog 1 0 6 20 ChB RIO In 3 333 8 Channel B 6 18 Analog In 2 340 6 Analog 1 0 6 20 ChB RIO In 4 334 8 Channel B 6 19 Analog In 3 341 6 Analog I O 6 20 ChB RIO In5 335 8 Channel B 6 1
106. 97 Analog In 3 Scale Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog In 3 Scale determines the scale factor or Factory Default 1 gain for the Analog In 3 value A 10V dc signal Minimum Value 16 applied to Analog In 3 atTB21 is converted to a Maximum Value 16 2048 digital value used by the 1336 FORCE File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input Before the digital value is displayed or transferred to the drive the scale factor is applied allowing an effective digital range of 32767 16 x 2048 The absolute digital value is clamped at 32767 Scale Factor Drive Units 1 2048 2 4096 4 8192 16 32767 398 Analog Input 4 Offset Parameter Number 398 Analog In 4 Offset Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 Analog In 4 Offset determines the offset applied to Factory Default 0 the raw Analog In 4 values before the scale factor is Minimum Value 20 Volts applied This allows you to shift the range of the Maximum Value 20 Volts analog input File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 33 399 Analog Input 4 Scale Analog In 4 Scale Analog In 4 Scale determines the scale factor or gain for the Analog In 4 value A 10V dc signal applied to Analog In 4 at TB21 is converted to a 2048 digital value used by the 1336 FORCE Before the digital value is displayed or transferred to the drive the s
107. 998 6 21 342 Analog Input 4 Parameter Number 342 Analog In 4 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Analog In 4 displays the result of converting a 10V Factory Default 0 signal to a 32767 value using Analog In 4 Scale Minimum Value 32767 parameter 399 and Analog In 4 Offset parameter Maximum Value 32767 398 You can link this digital value to other 1336 File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input FORCE parameters 343 Data Output A1 Parameter Number 343 Data Out Al Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Data Out A1 contains the first image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport input image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 344 Data Output A2 Data Out A2 Data Out A2 contains the second image word from the SCANport input image table Parameter Number 344 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 345 Data Output B1 Data Out B1 Data Out B1 contains the third image word from the SCANport input image table Parameter Number 345 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 346 Data Output B2
108. 998 In this first example when the torque command is greater than 25 the trend triggers and 50 post samples are taken at a rate of 4 milliseconds To set up this trend you would need to do the following 1 aN A wo amp 9 Decide which trend you are setting up trend 1 trend 2 trend 3 trend 4 For this example trend 1 is used Link parameter 454 Trend Input 1 to parameter 167 Internal Torque Cmd Link parameter 455 Trl Opnd Parm X to parameter 167 Internal Torque Cmd Select GT for parameter 457 Tr1 Operator Enter 25 for parameter 456 Trl Opnd Parm Y Enter 50 for parameter 459 Tr1 Post Samples Enter 4 for parameter 458 Trl Sample Rate Enter 1 for Trend Continuous Trigger to specify that a one shot operation is to be performed Link the Trend Output parameter to the Analog Output parameter In the second example the trend triggers and begins taking 100 post samples at a rate of 2 milliseconds when the velocity feedback parameter is greater than the velocity reference parameter 1 Decide which trend you are setting up trend 1 trend 2 trend 3 trend 4 Link the Trend Input parameter to the velocity feedback parameter Link the Operand X parameter to the velocity feedback parameter Select GT for Operator Link the Operand Y parameter to the velocity reference parameter Enter 100 for Post Samples Enter 2 for Sampling Rate Enter
109. AND ee bit s in Operand X corresponding to the bit s set in Operand Negated AND f begs Y are 0 s then the trigger condition is true Operand X to a 16 bit mask value in Operand y If any OR bit s in Operand X corresponding to the bit s set in Operand Y are 1 s then the trigger condition is true Operand X to a 16 bit mask value in Operand Yo any aoe bit s in Operand X corresponding to the bit s set in Operand Negated OR Y are 0 s then the trigger condition is true Operand X is generally linked to a 16 bit parameter such as Logic Status Operand Y specifies the bit s to check in Operand X To set the trigger condition 1 6 Select the Operand X parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 455 465 475 or 485 Enter a constant or a link to another parameter to set up the first part of the trigger point condition Select the Operator parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 457 467 477 or 487 Select the appropriate operator Select the Operand Y parameter for the appropriate trend parameter number 456 466 476 or 486 Select the second parameter or enter the appropriate value You can change any of these parameters while the trend is active Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 9 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Note For ease of programming the value of Operand Y is displayed in the same units as Ope
110. BTW l BTR 10 90 13 4102 1122281 482 453 479 477 478 480 475 Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 77 Trend File The Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Values function allows you to Trend Triggered Setup Parameter read the trend set up data for the stored data file Values PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 16 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Data Word 4 Data Word 5 Data Word 6 Data Word 7 Data Word 8 Data Word 9 Data Word 10 Data Word 11 Data Word 12 Data Word 13 Data Word 14 Data Word 15 Data Word 16 Message Length Header 3 Word 1 Message Length 16 PLC Decimal Value 4103 Message OK 28665 Message Error PLC Decimal Value Header 4103 Word 2 Header Trend Number Word 3 Sampling Input Link Clock Time Seconds hs of MS Clock Time Hour inute Clock Time Date Day Clock Time Year Month Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 78 Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Message Operation Values continued You can use the Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Values function to read the list of trend set up data for the stored data file The following are the valid trend numbers Peau Specifies that the c
111. Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bitod ___Rck Fit Grp 0 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 2 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 4 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 6 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Inhibit Grp 0 0 Group 0 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 0 Inhibit Grp 2 0 Group 2 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 2 Inhibit Grp 4 0 Group 4 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 4 Inhibit Grp 6 0 Group 6 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 40 427 Redundant Channel Number Redund Chan No When Redundant RIO Is Used Redund Chan No determines which channel number the 1336 FORCE will use for control purposes Input image data and messages from the selected channel are passed to the drive while input image data from the other channel are discarded Messages from the other channel are still accepted if the other channel is configured for RIO adapter mode with block transfer Output image data is sent to both channels The choices are 0 for channel A and 1 for channel B This is only active when both channels are set up for RIO and the redundant mode is selected on the DIP switches Images from the 1336 FORCE will go to both PLCs regardless of the parameter setting Channel A RIO Scanner Retries ChA RIOS Retries When RIO Scanner Is Used ChA RIOS Retries counts the number of communication retrie
112. Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 1 M OK 32767 Message Error Word 2 Number of Parameter Data Values to Read Word 3 Starting Parameter Data Number Word 4 Value Number 1 or Data Status Word Word 5 Message Length PLC Decimal Value Number of Parameter Values to Read Starting Parameter Number Value Number 2 or Data Status Word Word 6 Value Number 3 or Data Status Word Word 7 Value Number 60 or Data Status Word Word 64 Message Operation The Continuous Parameter Value Read function specified in the BTW reads a consecutive group of parameter values from the device beginning with the starting parameter number defined in word 4 of the BTW message Word 3 of the BTW message defines the number of parameters to be read The values return in the BTR response beginning with word 5 of the message If an error has occurred in reading any of the values the BTR returns a status word with a negative value instead of the parameter value Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Continuous Parameter Value Read continued 7 7 Example In this example 60 parameters were read from a 1336 FORCE beginning with parameter 10 The values of these parameters are returned in the BTR data file beginning at N10 94 The values are in drive units Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW Data File BTR Data File These values vary depending on parameters and produ
113. CE 5 13 September 1998 Check if the PLC has its rack inhibited Check if the PLC is scanning the rack Check the rack address on the PLC Communications Adapter Board Refer to the table in Chapter 2 to verify the DIP switch settings Fault text and Fault 8 15 ode type Description Suggested action The DIP switches indicate that a Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at So inten eee ChA GO Rack Flt warning module group 0 but no rack is heck 5 tie in 3 sags 36027 or none being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate that a Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at A EA ChA G2 Rack Flt warning module group 2 but no rack is Cheek i the oe pi 36028 or none being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate thata Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at Nee ChA G4 Rack Flt warning module group 4 but no rack is Check the jn 13 i 36029 or none being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate thata Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at sn Sh oases ChA G6 Rack Flt warning module group 6 but no rack is Check the e ence 36030 ornone being scanned at that module Check if power is ap
114. Channel B Remote 1 0 Output 0 Channel B Remote I O Output 1 Channel B Remote I O Output 2 Channel B Remote 1 0 Output 3 Channel B Remote I O Output 4 Channel B Remote 1 0 Output 5 Channel B Remote 1 0 Output 6 Channel B Remote I O Output 7 6 26 0 Channel B Remote I O Warning Select Zi Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Index Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Channel B Warning Status Clear Fault Command 6 36 Clear Fault Owner 6 29 conventions 6 11 cross reference by name cross reference b number 6 4 10 4 Data Input Al Data Input A2 Data Input B1 Data Input B2 Data Input C1 6 14 Data InputC2 6 14 Data Input D1 6 14 Data Input D2 6 14 Data Output Al 6 21 Data Output A2 6 21 Data Output B1 6 21 Data Output B2 6 21 Data Output C1 6 21 Data Output C2 6 22 Data Output D1 6 22 Data Output D2 6 22 definition of sink P 6 definition of sourcel P 4 Direction Mask El Direction ea Language Select 6 13 listing by files and groups 6 4 6 10 Local Mask Local Owner 6 29 Logic Command 5 1 PLC Communications Board Status Port Enable 6 35 pre configured links 2 14 Ramp Owner 6 29 Redundant Channel eure Reference Mask 6 36 Reset Drive Mask SCANport Default Referencel E7 Stop Owner Trend 1 Continuous Trigger 6 48 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X 6 46 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y 6 47 Trend 1 Operator 6 4
115. Continuous Parameter Value Read Continuous Parameter Value Write continuous trends 9 4 D data sample rate for trending 9 7 definitions P 4 DH channel configuration 1 1 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Index Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 choosing protocol command set 4 3 4 features message instruction 4 4 DIP switches ChA DIP Switch parameter 6 12 ChB DIP Switch parameter 6 12 DH 2 4 10 12 identifying faults in set METE 10 10 RIO adapter settings RIO a E ai rate DH station address 2 8 full rack for RIO scanner 2 4 last not last g roup 2 4 protocol rack configuration for RIO scanner rack size for RIO adapter 2 3 redundant RIO mode RIO rack address 2 5 RIO starting group 2 4 discrete 1 0 TB20 ar controller I O data transfer discrete PLC programming 3 4 example of 3 8 drive enable signal 1 5 drive units explained 2 14 E external fault signal 1 4 F FaultClearReset 7 14 Fault Entry Read Fulll 7 2 Faults Adapter Config Err 8 Adpt BRAM cksm 3 4 AP SW LM Rev Err 8 1 ChA Comm Loss 8 11 8 19 ChA G2 Rack Fit ChA G4 Rack Fit 8 15 ChA G6 Rack Fit 8 15 ChA Module Group EX fer ChA Res P gm Test channel A status channel B status 6 44 ChB Comm Loss 8 12 Te ChB Dup Nodeadadr ChB GO Rack Fit 8 15 ChB G2 Rack Fit 8 15 ChB G4 Rack Fit 8 15 ChB G6 Rack Fit 8 15 ChB
116. Data Out A2 Par 344 Data In B1 Par 316 Data Out B1 Par 345 2 Data In B2 Par 317 Data Out B2 Par 346 Data In C1 Par 318 Data Out C1 Par 347 i Data In C2 Par 319 Data Out C2 Par 348 Data In D1 Par 320 Data Out D1 Par 349 pS Data In D2 Par 321 Data Out D2 Par 350 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 10 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The RIO to SCANport RS232 485 to SCANport and DeviceNet to SCANport gateways are some of the devices that use the image Refer to the appropriate manual for your gateway Bulletin 1203 Remote I O Communications Module Bulletin 1203 Serial Communications Module or the DeviceNet Communications Module manual Setting Up the Analog I O Parameters The PLC Communications Adapter Board can transfer analog information over SCANport The following figure shows the five SCANports that are available for use with the SCANport analog I O and the PLC Communications Adapter Board parameters that you can use to control this data 1 gt SP Analog In Select Par 391 SP Analog 2 eK of In Par 338 i Bad 5 gt lt 338 gt 5 5 1 SP Analog Out Par 386 4 C 386 5 To receive analog input from a SCANport device you need to 1 Set the SCANport Analog Input Select parameter parameter 391 to the SCANport device number 2 Link a sink parameter to the SCANport Analog Input parameter parameter 338
117. Data Out B2 Data Out B2 contains the fourth image word from the SCANport input image table Parameter Number 346 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 347 Data Output C1 Data Out C1 Data Out C1 contains the fifth image word from the SCANport input image table Parameter Number 347 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 22 348 Data Output C2 Parameter Number 348 Data Out C2 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Data Out C2 contains the sixth image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport input image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 349 Data Output D1 Parameter Number 349 Data Out D1 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Data Out D1 contains the seventh image word from Factory Default 0 the SCANport input image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 350 Data Output D2 Parameter Number 350 Data Out D2 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Data Out D2 contains the e
118. Error Code Bit15 Parameter Data Number 2 Word 6 Data Link Number 2 Word 7 Data Parameter Number 30 Word 62 Data Link Number 30 Word 63 Data Status 2 or Error Code Bit15 Parameter Data i Number 30 Word 62 Data Status 30 or Error Code Word 63 Message Operation The Scattered Parameter Link Write function in this BTW writes up to 30 non consecutive links in any order from the drive Word 3 of the BTW defines the number of links to write Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 38 Scattered Parameter Link Write The links are then defined followed by each sink s corresponding continued source in the remainder of the header message You can define up to 30 scattered links with this function If an incorrect link is defined the BTR response returns a negative value for the sink parameter followed by a status or error code If there is an error in the block transfer word 2 of the BTR contains a value of 32763 Example In this example four scattered links were written to the drive as defined in word 3 of the BTW Words 4 and 5 N10 3 and N10 4 contain the first link with word 4 defining the sink parameter and word 5 the corresponding source Words 6 and 7 N10 5 and N10 6 contain the next link in the order of sink to source The remaining two links are contained in words 8 through 11 N10 7 10 The BTR responds with 0 in place of the source parameter to indicate a successful link Data F
119. FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 68 Trend File The Trigger Time function allows you to read the trigger time for the Trigger Time specified trend file from the drive PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 7 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header 3 Word 1 Message Length 7 PLC Decimal Value 4099 Message OK 28669 Message Error Trend Number Time PLC Decimal Value Header 4099 Word 2 Header Trend Number Word 3 Clock Seconds 10ths of MS Clock Time Hour inute Clock Time Date Day Time Clock Year Month Message Operation You can use the Trigger Time function to read the trigger time for the specified trend file from the drive The following are the valid trend numbers Race Specifies that the command is to be sent for 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Trigger Time continued 7 69 The time is based on a 24 hour clock This field Indicates The seconds high byte and tenths of milliseconds Seconds low byte The seconds can be 0 through 59 and the tenths of milliseconds can be 0 through 99 The hour high byte Valid values are 0 through Hour 23 Minute The number of minutes passed the hour low byte Valid values are 0 through 59 Th
120. IO In1 8 Channel B 6 18 370 Dir Owner 5 Owners 6 28 332 ChB RIO In 2 8 Channel B 6 18 371 Start Owner 5 Owners 6 28 333 ChB RIO In3 8 Channel B 6 18 372 Jog 1 Owner 5 Owners 6 28 334 ChB RIO In 4 8 Channel B 6 19 373 Jog 2 Owner 5 Owners 6 28 335 ChB RIO In 5 8 Channel B 6 19 374 SetRef Owner 5 Owners 6 28 336 ChB RIO In 6 8 Channel B 6 19 l l 375 Local Owner 5 Owners 6 29 337 ChB RIO In 7 8 Channel B 6 20 376 Flux Owner 5 Owners 6 29 338 SP Analog In 3 SCANport 1 0 6 20 377 Trim Owner 5 Owners 6 29 339 Analog In 1 6 Analog I O 6 20 l 378 Ramp Owner 5 Owners 6 29 340 Analog In 2 6 Analog 1 0 6 20 l 379 Clr Fault Owner 5 Owners 6 29 341 Analog In 3 6 Analog 1 0 6 20 386 SP Analog Out 3 SCANport 1 0 6 30 342 Analog In 4 6 Analog 1 0 6 21 l 387 Analog Out 1 6 Analog I O 6 30 343 Data OutAl 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 388 Analog Out2 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 gt Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Parameters included in Groups 7 and 8 depend on the selected communications Shaded parameters do not exist when DH is selected Inputs are variable and depend on rack size and whether block transfer is enabled
121. If an error had occurred for a specific link the value returned would be negative Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 BTW Sink Source BTW Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 34 Link Write The Link Parameter Write message writes the source parameter link Link Parameter Write to the linkable sink parameter This function writes only one link PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 30464 Word 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2304 Message OK 30464 Message Error Header Sink Parameter Number Word 3 Data Link Parameter Word 4 Message Operation Sink Parameter Number Link Parameter The Link Parameter Write function specified in the BTW writes the corresponding source parameter link to the defined linkable sink parameter The sink parameter is defined in word 3 of the BTW data file with its linked source defined in word 4 If an error has occurred in the link word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 30464 Example In this example a link was defined between the sink parameter defined in word 3 parameter 101 External Velocity Reference and the source parameter parameter 340 Analog Input 2 The BTR header message confirmed the link by returning a value of 2034 in word 2 and the link in orde
122. Logic Status Low 56 Logic Status Hi 57 Logic Options 59 SCANport Owners Stop Owner 369 Start Owner 371 J og1 Owner 372 J og2 Owner 373 Direction Owner 370 Set Ref Owner 374 Local Owner 375 Flux Owner 376 Trim Owner 377 Ramp Owner 378 Clr Fault Owner 379 File 2 Communications 1 0 Analog Input Group Analog In 1 339 An In 1 Offset 392 An In 1 Scale 393 Analog In 2 340 An In 2 Offset 394 An In 2 Scale 395 Analog In 3 341 An In 3 Offset 396 An In 3 Scale 397 Analog In 4 342 An In 4 Offset 398 An In 4 Scale 399 SP Analog In 338 SP Analog Sel 391 SCANport Masks Port Enable Mask 408 Start Mask 410 J og Mask 411 Direction Mask 409 Reference Mask 412 Local Mask 415 Clear Fault Mask 413 Reset Drive Mask 414 Analog Output Group Analog Out 1 387 An Out 1 Offset 400 An Out 1 Scale 401 Analog Out 2 388 An Out 2 Offset 402 An Out 2 Scale 403 Analog Out3 389 An Out 3 Offset 404 An Out 3 Scale 405 Analog Out4 390 An Out 4 Offset 406 An Out 4 Scale 407 SP Analog Out 386 SCANport I O Data In Al 314 Data In A2 315 Data In B1 316 Data In B2 317 Data In C1 318 Data In C2 319 Data In D1 320 Data In D2 321 Data Out A1 343 Data Out A2 344 Data Out B1 345 Data Out B2 346 Data OutC1 347 Data Out C2 348 Data Out D1 349 Data Out D2 350 E Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 FORCE user manual These group s may or may not exist due to protocol DIP switch co
123. Message Operation The Run Time Accumulator Data Read through BTR word 4 provides the running service time in hours As a maintenance feature you can use this information to help define a service schedule for the drive You can clear the accumulated time through a Clear Run Time Accumulator request Information can then provide the accumulated run time between each scheduled service Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Run Time Accumulator Data Read continued 7 49 Example In this example the BTW requested the accumulated running time of the drive The BTR response returned a value of 41 in word 4 indicating a running time of 41 hours This value can be monitored and when a specified running time has accumulated a maintenance down time can be scheduled Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW Data File BTR f Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 50 Run Time Accumulator The Clear Run Time Accumulator message provides a way of Clear Run Time Accumulator clearing the run time accumulator data stored in the drive PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header 3 Word 1 Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value Header PLC Decimal Value 2818 Message OK 29950 Message Error 29950 Word 2 Header Word 3
124. Module Group 8 9 ChB ished eer ChB Rack Fault ChB Res Pgm Test 8 14 code descriptions 8 6 description of queues 8 4 display types 8 6 Drv Types Differ 8 7 Faults Cleared 8 4 HW Malfunction 8 4 111 Drive Type 8 7 identifying at ports 6 44 SP Ptl Timeout SP Pt2 Timeout SP Pt3 Timeout 8 4 SP Pt4 Timeout 8 8 SP Pt5 Timeout 8 8 SW Malfunction E5 types of 8 4 function blocks available block types 5 14 overview 5 11 functions T masking 5 ownership of 5 5 H hardware block diagram 0 analog See analog 1 0 discrete See discrete 1 0 input voltage 1 4 L last not last group scanned 2 4 Link Parameter Read 7 29 ats Parameter Write 7 34 pora define pre configured 2 Load Clock Info Stamp 733 M manuals related P 3 masking functions 5 4 Maximum Trend Size Available motor thermo signal 1 9 mounting instructions 1 4 N norm stop signal 1 4 Number of Trends Available O offsets 2 1 one shot trends 9 4 ownership of drive functions 5 4 P Parameter Link Clear 7 39 Parameter Read Full 7 10 Parameter Value Read 7 4 Parameter Value Write Parameters E Analog Input 1 2 10 6 20 Analog Input 1 Offset Analog Input 2 2 10 6 20 Analog Input 2 Offset Analog Input 3 et Analog Input 3 Offset 2 10 6 32 Analog Input 3 Scale EURE E Analog Input 4 Offset EE Analog Input 1 Scale 2
125. Node Address Destination Data Table Address ERROR CODE BLOCK SIZE 9 WORDS Press a function key to change a value gt Rem Prog Forces None Size in Elements Data F ormatted PLC 5 TYPED READ 20 0 Ignore if timed out to be retried awaiting execution continuous error message done message transmitting N10 100 message enabled control bit addr N7 0 15 5 10 File Temp Toggle Bit Drive 1 Parameter Read MSG SEND REC MESSAGE Control Block N7 0 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 4 6 Rung 2 0 This rung will read parameters 100 109 on a continuous basis by using the Message Block enable bit to toggle the next message The parameter information is stored in N20 0 9 in the PLC The drive DH station ID is 11 Message Enable Bit Drive 1 N7 0 MESSAGE INSTRUCTION DATA MONITOR FOR CONTROL BLOCK N7 0 Communication Command PLC 5 Data Table Address Size in Elements Local Remote Remote Station Link ID Remote Link Type Local Node Address Destination Data Table Address ERROR CODE BLOCK SIZE 9WORDS Press a function key to change a value gt Rem Prog Forces None Size in Elements Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Data Formatted PLC 5 TYPED READ N20 0 Ignore if timed out to be retried awaiting execution continuous error message done message transmitting N10 100 message enabled control bit addr N
126. ORCE 5 13 September 1998 Information transferred back to the PLC controller from the drive is handled much as it was in the previous example with the exception that data is transferred into the input image table of the PLC controller Again note that bit coded words such as parameter 56 Logic Status LOW are bit numbered in octal in the PLC controller while the drive is in decimal A PLC controller uses block transfer to transfer data that does not require continuous updates To do this the PLC Communications Adapter Board provides a status word to the PLC during the normal discrete transfer scan This status word occupies the first module group in the PLC I O image table for the designated rack The PLC program then uses the status word to control the Block Transfer Write BTW and the Block Transfer Read BTR functions of the PLC controller The BTW transfers a request of either a read or a write of data to the drive The BTR transfers a response of either the data being read or a status from the drive of the data write operation Remote I O Module Status Word In addition to the block transfer status word the PLC Communications Adapter Board returns the RIO status word The RIO status word is the first word associated with the rack in the PLC input image table The RIO status word indicates the condition of the PLC Communications Adapter Board and is not part of the standard block transfer instructions in the PLC program T
127. ORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 46 442 SCANport Fault Status Parameter Number 442 SP Fault Sts Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits SP Fault Sts indicates which communications soft Factory Default 0011 1110 faults the drive has encountered at the ports Minimum Value 0000 0000 Maximum Value 0011 1110 File Group Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select S tatus Enums Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Enums Fault Poi SP Ptl Timeout F lt 26038 Port2 SP Pt Timeout F It 26039 Port3 SP Pt3 Timeout F It 26040 Port 4 SP Pt4 Timeout F lt 26041 Port5 SP Pt5 Timeout F It 26042 443 SCANport Warning Status Parameter Number 443 SP Warn Sts Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits SP Warn Sts indicates which communications Factory Default 0011 1110 warnings the drive has encountered at the ports Minimum Value 0000 0000 Maximum Value 0011 1110 File Group Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select S tatus Enums Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Enums Warning Port1 SP Ptl Timeout F lt 26038 Port2 SP Pt2 Timeout F It 26039 Port3 SP Pt3 Timeout F It 26040 Port4 SP Pt4 Timeout F lt 26041 Port5 SP Pt5 Timeout Flt 26042 454 Trend Input 1 Parameter Number 454 Trend In 1 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Trend In 1 specifies the data value to sample atthe Fact
128. Of 03 Of Of Of Off On On 43 On Off Of Off On n 04 Of Off Of On Of Of 44 On Off Of On Of Of 05 Of Off Of On Of On 45 On Off Of On Of On 06 Of Off Of On On Off 46 On Off Of On On Off 07 Of Off Of On On n 47 On Of Of On On amp 10 Of Of On Of Of Of 50 On Off On Of Of Of 11 Of Off On Of Of On 51 On Of On Of Of On 12 Of Off On Off On Off 52 On Of On Of On Off 13 Off Off On Off On On 53 On Off On Off On 14 Of Off On On Of Off 54 On Off On On Of Off 15 Off Of On On Of On 55 On Of On Om Of On 16 Off Of On On On Off 56 On Off On On On Of 17 Of Off On On On 57 On Of On On On On 20 Of On Of Of Of Of 60 Or On Of Of Of Of 21 Of On Of Of Of On 61 Or On Of Off Of On 22 Of On Of Off On Of 62 On On Of Off On Of 23 Of On Of Off On On 63 On On Of Off On 24 Of On Of On Of Of 64 On On Off On Of Of 25 Of On Of On Of On 65 Or On Of On Of n 26 Of On Of On On Of 66 On On Of On O Of 27 Of On Of On On 67 Oa On Of On On amp 30 Of On On Of Of Of 70 On On On Of Of Off 31 Of On On Of Of On 71 On On On Of Of On 32 Off On On Off On Off 72 On On On Off On Of 33 Of On On Off On 73 On Om On Of On O 34 Of On On On Of Off 74 On On On On Of Off 35 Off On On On Of On 75 On On On On Off 36 Off On On On O Off 76 On On On On On Off 37 Of On On On On O 77 On On On On On On Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Setting Up the Analog 1 0 Before you can transfer data between the PLC Communications Adapter Board and the analog I O you need to do the following 1 Hard
129. Owner 5 Owners 6 29 337 ChB RIO In 7 8 Channel B 6 20 376 Flux Owner 5 Owners 6 29 338 SP Analog In 3 SCANport 1 0 6 20 377 Trim Owner 5 Owners 6 29 339 Analog In 1 6 Analog I O 6 20 l 378 Ramp Owner 5 Owners 6 29 340 Analog In 2 6 Analog 1 0 6 20 l 379 Clr Fault Owner 5 Owners 6 29 341 Analog In 3 6 Analog 1 0 6 20 386 SP Analog Out 3 SCANport 1 0 6 30 342 Analog In 4 6 Analog 1 0 6 21 l 387 Analog Out 1 6 Analog I O 6 30 343 Data OutAl 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 388 Analog Out2 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 Parameters included in Groups 7 and 8 depend on the selected communications gt Shaded parameters do not exist when DH is selected Inputs are variable and depend on rack size and whether block transfer is enabled Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 No Name Group Page Group 389 Analog Out3 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 SP Warn Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 46 390 Analog Out 4 6 Analog 1 0 6 30 454 Trend In1 9 Trend I O 6 46 391 SP Analog Sel 3 SCANport 1 0 6 31 455 Trl Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 46 392 An In 1 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 456 Trl Opnd Parm Y 9 Trend Setup 6 47 393 An In 1 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 31 457
130. RCE 5 13 September 1998 Specifying Whether You Are Using Redundant RIO Use the following chart to set switch 8 on either U2 or U4 Are you using redundant RIO mode If Then set SW8 to Yes On No Off If you are using redundant RIO mode make sure that both channels have the same RIO configuration protocol selection and rack size If you do not use the same rack size and protocol for both channels you will get a fault For more information about redundant RIO refer to Chapter 3 Using Remote I O Communications Selecting the RIO Starting Group Use the following chart to set switches 1 and 2 on either U3 or U5 to specify the rack starting group If the starting group must be Set SW1 to And SW2 to Group 0 Off Off Group 2 Off On Group 4 On Off Group 6 On On 2 5 Setting the RIO Rack Address Use the following chart to set switches 3 through 8 on either U3 or U5 to specify the RIO rack address U3 or U5 A OFF lt ON Switches 3 through 8 565565656 556655665 5656656655 5555656655 556565565 S6555656655 65565556 56665665 55556566566 5555555 5555555 S56666665 5656556655 5565655655 55555555 Sb656656565655 55555555 66566565655 5655655656 55565655665 5555565666 S555555 55555555 55555555 55565656 556656665 5555556656 55555555 S555565 565 S555555 565555555 556655665 555555666 555555655 S65656566565 55555555 565565656 55565655656 555556556656
131. Ref Enums Bit1 Xrefl Bit2 Presetl Bit3 Preset2 Bit5 Preset4 Bit6 Presets Bit 7 Xref2 Bit 4 Preset3 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 38 425 Channel A Remote I O Fault Select ChA RIOA Flt Sel adapter mode ChA RIOS Fit Sel scanner mode ChA RIOx Fit Sel dictates whether the PLC Communications Adapter Board will report a fault condition if a PLC controller RIO communications fault occurs at channel A If a bit is zero parameter 426 is checked to see whether a warning condition should be reported ChA RIOx Flt Sel is not used if channel A is set up for DH communications Parameter Number 425 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value File Group 15 adapter or 255 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communication I O Fault S elect S tatus When RIO adapter is used Enums Bits 7 4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bito ___ Res Pgm Test Fit 36023 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Comm Loss Flt 36021 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Last S tate 0 Data zeroed 1 Last state Rack Inhibit F It 36025 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Notused When RIO scanner is used Enums Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bitod as Rck Fit Grp 0 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 2 0 No rack f
132. Sel im TP 27 28 26 29 32 33 34 35 30 31 36 38 37 Torque Autotune Autotun Diag Sel Ph RotCur Ref Auto Tune Torque Auto Tune Speed Ph Rot Freq Ref Phs Test Rot Error Lo Test Error Rs Test Error Id Test E rror Torq Calc Error Stator Res Leakage Ind Base Flux Cur Base Torque Cur Base Torque Volt Base Flux Volt Vde Max Vge Max Vde Min Base Slip Freq Base Slip Fr Max Base Slip Fr Min Kp Slip Ki Slip Kp Flux Ki Flux Torq TP Sel 1 Torg TP Data 1 256 262 40 41 263 294 295 296 297 298 236 237 238 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 273 274 Velocity Autotune Autotun Diag Sel Auto Tune Torque Auto Tune Speed Total Inertia Motor Inertia Auto Tune Status Vel Desired BW Vel Damp Factor Ki Velocity Loop Kp Velocity Loop Kf Velocity Loop Auto Tune TP Sel Auto Tune TP Descriptions of the shaded parameters are located in the 1336 FORCE user manual Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 256 40 41 46 234 44 43 45 159 140 141 48 41 Monitor Filt Vel Fdbk Scaled Vel Fdbk Int Torque R ef Internal Iq Ref Computed P ower DC Bus Voltage Motor Volt F dbk Motor Curr F dbk Freq Command Inv Temp F dbk Torq Mode Stat Lim Motor F lux Enc Pos Fdbk Low Enc Pos Fdbk Hi MCB Counter 269 147 167 168 182 268 265 264 266 270 184 271 148 149 File 4 Diagnostics Testpoints Vel Fdbk TP Sel Vel Fdbk TP Low Vel Fdbk TP Hi
133. Sink Display Units Drive Units None Tr4 Operator specifies the operator used for the Factory Default 5 trend trigger evaluation The available operators Minimum Value 1 are Maximum Value 8 Valde Description File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 1 GreaterThan GT 2 Less Than LT 3 Equals LEQ 4 Not E quals CNE 5 Logical AND AND 6 Logical NAND NAND T Logical OR OR 8 Logical NOR NOR 488 Trend 4 Sample Rate Parameter Number 488 Tr4 Sample Rate Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Seconds Tr4 Sample Rate specifies the interval atwhich the Factory Default 0 020 Seconds data in the Trend In 4 parameter is sampled It is Minimum Value 0 002 Seconds programmable in 2 millisecond increments All Maximum Value 30 Seconds values are rounded down to the nearest 2 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup millisecond interval Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 55 489 Trend 4 Post Samples Tr4 Post Samples Tr4 Post Samples specifies the number of data samples to be gathered once the trigger evaluation becomes true There is always a sample reserved for the instance when the trigger condition becomes true Parameter Number 489 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 499 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 490 Trend 4 Continuous Trigger Tr4 Cont Trigger
134. Throughout this manual parameters the following symbol indicates a sink parameter C_D Source Source parameters provide real time information that is available for parameters other devices to use These devices can include PLC controllers Read only operator interface devices programming terminals etc Throughout this parameters manual the following symbol indicates a source parameter lt gt Trending is a diagnostic tool used to capture and retain an input Trending parameter data value such as velocity feedback until a trigger condition Common Techniques Used in this Manual Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 drive fault or malfunction condition halts or suspends sampling The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Bulleted lists provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Allen Bradley Support Catalog Number Description Allen Bradley offers support services worldwide with over 75 Sales Support Offices 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone plus Allen Bradley representatives in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for e sales and order support e product technical training e warranty support support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you n
135. V Factory Default 0 signal The digital value is linked to a 1336 FORCE Minimum Value 32767 source parameter which provides a value that is Maximum Value 32767 scaled and offset The results are converted to a File Group Communication I O Analog Output voltage signal where 2048 results in a 10V output 389 Analog Output 3 Parameter Number 389 Analog Out 3 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog Out 3 converts a 32767 value to a 10V Factory Default 0 signal The digital value is linked to a 1336 FORCE Minimum Value 32767 source parameter which provides a value that is Maximum Value 32767 scaled and offset The results are converted to a File Group Communication I O Analog Output voltage signal where 2048 results in a 10V output 390 Analog Output 4 Parameter Number 390 Analog Out 4 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog Out 4 converts a 32767 value to a 10V Factory Default 0 signal The digital value is linked to a 1336 FORCE Minimum Value 32767 source parameter which provides a value that is Maximum Value 32767 scaled and offset The results are converted to a voltage signal where 2048 results in a 10V output File Group Communication 1 0 Analog Output Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 31 391 SCANport Analog Select SP Analog Sel SP Analog Sel indicates which port 1 through 5 is to receive th
136. a digital value of 4096 for 100 torque and 10 volts sends a digital value of 4096 for 100 torque Figure 2 2 Potentiometer 0 10V Range to Control 100 Torque Reference Ext Torque Analog In 2 Reference 1 Potentiometer 10V 0 5V 10V digital value 2048 0 1024 2048 Adding 1024 1024 0 1024 Scale by 4 4096 0 4096 Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Output Analog outputs are similar to analog inputs Each output has a scale and offset parameter along with a specific variable parameter used for linking Differences occur because of the direction of information flow The drive sends a digital value in drive units which must be matched to the voltage of the monitoring device Similar to analog inputs the analog output converts a 2048 value to 10V dc Thus when the drive sends 100 base speed equal to 4096 it must be scaled by 0 5 to be in the proper range 4096 x 0 5 2048 The offset can be 20V dc even though the physical limit is 10V dc This allows you to offset the signal anywhere within the entire range In Figure 2 3 Analog Output 1 is used as an example to show the scale and offset parameters At Analog Output 1 a meter with a range of 0 through 10V dc has been connected Analog Output 1 has been linked to Velocity Feedback parameter 269 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 13 For the meter to indicate speed in both directions you need to adjust the scale and of
137. able D11 LANGUAGE MOOULE m V336T GTIEN 1 01 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Chapter 8 provides information to help you in trouble shooting the PLC Communications Adapter Board This chapter describes e the fault and status LEDs e the fault queues the fault types e the fault codes ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with the 1336 FORCE drive system and associated machinery should perform troubleshooting or maintenance functions on the drive Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and or equipment damage The following shows the fifteen status and fault LEDs that are located on the PLC Communications Adapter Board to provide a visual indication of board operation The PLC Communications Adapter Board is a non serviceable device If you did not properly configure the PLC Communications Adapter Board the board will indicate faults and or hardware malfunctions You should verify the system configuration before checking for faults or hardware malfunctions DP Status D3 DP Status D6 Channel A Status D8 Channel A Status D10 Channel A Status D12 Channel B Status D13 Channel B Status D14 Channel B Status D15 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 2 Application Processor AP Status D1 and D2 These LEDs reflect the operational status of the application processor LED State Function D1 Red LED on AP hard fault LED off D6 on or hardwa
138. age Instruction The message instruction is used to read and write a block of data to another station on the DH link The following is a description of the message instruction field data Refer to the example program at the end of this chapter for a message instruction example This function Communication Command Specifies Whether the MSG instruction performs a PLC5 TYPED READ to read data from the drive or a PLC 5 TYPED WRITE to write data to the drive PLCS Data Table Address The data file address where data is stored eIf the MSG operation is a write this address is the starting word of the source file for data sent to the PLC Communications Adapter Board eIf the MSG operation is a read this address is the starting word of the destination file for data returned from the PLC Communications Adapter Board Size In Elements The number of elements to be transferred Note that eFor a Read Parameter function each element is one word Therefore when reading 10 parameter values the field needs to be a length of 10 elements eFor a Read Parameter Full each element is 20 words long Therefore a Read Full function of 6 parameters requires an entry of 120 elements eFor N40 the size must be 64 words Local Remote Local indicates the message is sent to a device on the local DH link For this application this field is always local Local Node Address The local station address on the DH link
139. al e Allen Bradley support Use this manual if you are responsible for installing wiring starting up programming or troubleshooting control systems that use the PLC Communications Adapter Board To use this product you should be able to program and operate an Allen Bradley PLC and or DriveTools In particular you need to be familiar with remote I O concepts and configurations and be able to program block transfer instructions You can add a PLC Communications Adapter Board to your 1336 FORCE system to expand the communications capabilities The following are the major features of the PLC Communications Adapter Board e support for both Data Highway Plus DH and remote I O RIO communications with up to five SCANport devices and two RIO devices that allow you to connect to a wide range of Allen Bradley devices e an RIO scanner mode that allows your 1336 FORCE system to control a logical rack of devices without using a PLC Note Block transfer and complementary I O are not supported with RIO scanner mode e four analog inputs and four analog outputs e function block programming to help you customize the way your drive operates e trending capabilities as a diagnostic tool to allow you to capture data values for a parameter e a32 event fault and warning queue Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 P 2 Purpose of this Manual Chapter This manual e provides planning installation and wiring i
140. alog In 4 value A 2048 value Minimum Value 1 corresponds to a 10V output signal atTB21 The Maximum Value 1 value sent linked to Analog Out 4 is scaled by the File Group Communication 1 0 Analog Output corresponding scale parameter before it is offset and converted to an analog signal Scale Factor Drive Units 1 32767 1 2 16383 1 4 8192 1 16 2048 408 Port Enable Parameter Number 408 Port Enable Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Port Enable indicates which ports can accept Factory Default 0 commands listed in parameters 409 through 415 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCANport Masks Enums Bit1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit7 Channel B 409 Direction Mask Parameter Number 409 Dir Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Dir Mask controls which ports can issue Factory Default 0 forward reverse commands Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCANport Masks Enums Bit1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B 410 Start Mask Parameter Number 410 Start Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Start Mask controls which ports can issue a start Factory Default 0 command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Co
141. alue 5 Number of Parameter Links to Read Parameter Number 1 Parameter Number 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 5 Message OK 32763 Message Error Word 2 Number of Parameter Data Links to Read Word 3 Parameter Data Number 1 Word 4 Source Parameter Data Number 1 Word 5 Parameter Data Number 2 Word 6 Source Parameter Data Number 2 Word 7 Parameter Number Data 30 Word 62 Data Word 63 Parameter Data Number 30 Word 62 Source Parameter Data Number 30 Word 63 Message Operation The Scattered Parameter Link Read function requested in the BTW reads up to 30 non consecutive links made in the drive You request the desired link information by defining the sink parameters in the BTW message Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Scattered Parameter Link Read continued 7 33 The corresponding source parameters are returned through the BTR response If an error has occurred in reading any of the links e Word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 32763 e Bit 15 of the BTR word for the number of that link is set making the value negative Example In this example a Scattered Parameter Link Read of four links was requested through the BTW Sink parameters 119 through 367 and 401 were defined as the desired links to be read The BTR returned the corresponding source parameter values in the words reserved for this information
142. ameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 3 Tripped Trigger Trending is executing and the trigger point has been reached 4 Tripped Forced The trigger point was forced 471 Trend 2 Select Parameter Number 471 Tr2 Select Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Tr2 Select specifies the trend mode Thestates are Factory Default 0 as follows Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 I cei File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 2 Force a true trigger condition Enums 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Force Trig 472 Trend 2 Status Parameter Number 472 Tr2 Status Parameter Type Read Only Non Linkable Source Display Units Drive Units None Tr2 Status identifies which state the trend is Factory Default 1 currently in The following states are possible Minimum Value 1 1 Stopped Trending is not executing ainun yai 5 4 2 anes Trending i tino butthe tri File Group Diagnostics Trend I O g rending is executing but the trigger point has not yet been reached Enums 1 Stopped 2 Running 3 Trip Trig 4 Force Trip Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 51 473 Trend Output 2 Trend Out 2 Trend Out 2 displays the latest 500 trend input data values once the trigger condition is true and all post samples are gathered This parameter is updated at the same rate as the
143. amming can be carried out completely within the drive e On larger system applications the loading of the PLC control system can be reduced as control functions previously performed within a PLC can be performed within the drive At the base of the function block system are the function blocks themselves A function block is a firmware subroutine that is stored in memory within the PLC Communications Adapter Board The PLC Communications Adapter Board provides 28 different function block types Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 12 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 These function blocks are as follows This function type Is ABS An absolute value function block whose output is the positive value BIN2DEC A binary to decimal function block that takes sixteen input words and produces one decimal output word COMPHYST A compare with hysteresis function block that checks for input equals preset value with a hysteresis around the value DEC2BIN A decimal to binary function block that takes one decimal input word and produces sixteen binary output words DELAY A time delay function block that echoes a logic input after a delay DERIV A derivative function block that calculates the change in input per second DIVIDE A divide function block that divides two signed integers EXOR2 An exclusive OR function that takes two
144. annel A or B has control of the drive Output image table data from the non controlling PLC is discarded However if the protocols for both channels is set to RIO adapter with block transfer then block transfer requests are accepted from both channels To use the RIO redundant mode you need to e Configure both channel A and channel B for the RIO protocol e Set the DIP switch for channel A for the redundant mode e Configure both channel A and channel B for the same size For example both channels must be configured for a full 3 4 1 2 or 1 4 rack Output data from the drive is sent to both PLCs 3 19 The following shows a typical redundant mode configuration PLC Controller 1 Output Image Table Group Number Full YOU FR WNP OS Mon n 0 2 0 2 4 0 2 4 6 1 3 1 3 55 1 3 57 2 4 214 6 35 35 7 4 6 5 7 Input Image Table PLC Controller 2 1336 FORCE PLC COMM ADAPTER Channel A B 1 Parameter 427 Switches Between Channel A amp B Full YOU FR WNP OO 3 4 0 2 13 2 4 3 5 4 6 5 7 Output Image Table Group Number 12 0 2 4 1 3 5 2 416 3 5 7 1 4 0 21416 1 3 5 7 Input Image Table Channel B OS a CED lt m 7 tput goes to both PLCs OS Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 20 Using RIO Scanner Mode Publica
145. annelA Bit 7 Channel B Bit 4 Port4 373 Jog2 Owner IJ og2 Owner J og2 Owner displays which ports are presently issuing a valid J og2 command Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 373 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 OFE Hex File Group Communications I O SCAN port Owners Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit5 Port5 Bit2 Port2 374 Set Reference Owner Set Ref Owner Set Ref Owner displays which port currently has exclusive control in selecting the command frequency source Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 374 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit5 Port5 Bit2 Port2 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Bit3 Port3 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B Bit3 Port3 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B 6 29 375 Local Owner Local Owner Local Owner displays which port has requested exclusive control of all drive logic functions If a port is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other ports are locked out and are Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 375 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 OFE Hex File Group Communications I O SCANport Owners
146. anner is used Enums Bit3 Bit2 Bitl BitO Enums Fault L Rck FitGrp0 ChA GO Rack Fit Fit 36027 Rck Fit Grp2 ChA G2 Rack Flt Fit 36028 Rck Fit Grp4 ChA G4 Rack Flt Fit 36029 Rck Fit Grp6 ChA G6 Rack Flt Fit 36030 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 44 437 Channel A Warning Status ChA Warn Sts ChA Warn Sts lists the current warning conditions at channel A of the PLC Communications Adapter Board This is only present if channel A is defined to be either RIO adapter or RIO scanner Parameter Number 437 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value File Group 7 adapter or 15 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault S elect S tatus When RIO adapter is used Enums Bit2 Bitl Bit0 Enums Warning L Res Pgm Test ChA Res P gm Test F It 36023 Comm Loss ChA Comm Loss Flt 36021 Rack Inhibit Rack Inhibit Flt 36025 When RIO scanner is used Enums Bit3 Bit2 Bit Bit0 Enums Warning Rck Flt Grp0 ChA GO Rack Fit Fit 36027 Rck Fit Grp2 ChA G2 Rack Fit Fit 36028 Rck Fit Grp4 ChA G4 Rack Fit Fit 36029 Rck Flt Grp6 ChA G6 Rack Fit F It 36030 438 Channel B Fault Status Parameter Number 438 ChB Fault Sts Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits ChB Fault Sts lists the current fault conditions at Factory Default 0 channel B of the PLC Communications A
147. apter covers the following topics e using trend parameters e understanding how trending works e setting up the trigger point e adjusting the data sample rate e setting the number of post samples e setting the buffer type e forcing a trigger condition e using cascading trends looking at the results of the trend e looking at trend examples Trending is a diagnostic tool that you can use to capture and retain an input parameter data value such as velocity feedback until a trigger condition drive fault or malfunction condition halts or suspends sampling With trending you can program the parameter to sample the trigger condition the rate of sampling and the number of post samples taken once the trigger is true Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 9 2 Using Trend Parameters The PLC Communications Adapter Board contains four trend buffers that you can set up to monitor any parameter Each buffer can store up to 500 data points Parameters 454 through 493 are associated with trending Parameter Parameter Specifies number name The data value to sample at the specified trend 454 464 Trend Input sample rate You should link this parameter to 474 484 the parameter that is to be sampled Trend Operand The first half of the trend trigger evaluation 455 465 7 Parameter X This parameter is generally linked to another 475 485 Operand X parameter Trend Ope
148. arameter Number 414 Reset Drive Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Reset Drive Mask controls which ports can reset a Factory Default 0 fault Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communication I O SCANport Masks Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit 4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 415 Local Mask Parameter Number 415 Local Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Local Mask controls which ports are allowed to take Factory Default 0 exclusive control of drive logic commands except Minimum Value 0 Stop Stop is accepted from any device regardless Maximum Value OFE Hex of who has control You can only take exclusive File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners local control while the drive is stopped Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit 3 Port3 Bit 4 Port 4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 37 416 SCANport Default Reference SP Default Ref SP Default Ref defines the default reference to be used when the drive is powered up You can change the value of this parameter but the change is only accessed when the drive is powered up Parameter Number 416 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 2 Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 7 File Group Velocity Torque Velocity
149. arameters are used for set up Parameter Parameter These parameters determine number name the 392 394 Analog Input ne a pv P 396 398 Offset nput values before the scale factor is applied 393 395 Analog Input Scale factor or gain for Analog 397 399 Scale Input values 400 402 Analog Output a Dees ma 404 406 Offset ne E RAE eie factor is applied 401 403 Analog Output Scale factor or gain for Analog 405 407 Scale Input values Configuration parameters allow the PLC Communications Adapter Board to communicate with the drive You need to link the configuration parameters to parameters in the drive The following are the analog input and output configuration parameters Parameter Parameter These parameters are the number name Source parameters that are the result of converting a 10V signal 339 342 Analog Input to a 32767 value using the associated scale and offset parameters 387 390 Analog Output Sink parameters used to convert 32767 values to a 10V signal Each analog input and output is associated with a scaling and offset set up parameter You must adjust these parameters for each analog device The drive works with internal drive units Each parameter is a 16 bit word that allows a range of 32767 internal units The drive is scaled so that 4096 is equal to one unit or 100 of the quantity being regulated A 10V dc signal applied to an analog input is converted
150. as terminals the PLC Communications Adapter Board uses the SCANport communications protocol You can access the SCANport capabilities without doing any special configuration However if you plan to use SCANport you can make some changes to the default configuration to customize the way SCANport works for you Chapter 5 Understanding the Resources of Your Drive contains information about SCANport and how you can change the default configuration The PLC Communications Adapter Board is shipped pre configured The pre configured default links assume channel A is defined for DH and channel B for RIO Some of the inputs and outputs to the board are linked to a pre defined signal Figure 2 4 shows the 1336 FORCE standard configuration for the PLC Communications Adapter Board You can change this and re configure the drive on a per application basis Note When a link is set up the data is transferred from the configured source to a sink every millisecond Figure 2 4 PLC Communications Adapter Board Configuration 2 15 Example Pre Configured Links Channel A is DH Channel B is RIO PLC Controller 1336 FORCE Remote 1 0 Interface Output Image Table PLC Comm Adapter Group Number Channel B Full 3 4 1 2 1 4 Drive 0 oR 0 214 0 2 4 6 Reserved for block Parameters P OB 186 1367 transfer 2 2 4 214 6 3 35 3 5 77 4 4 6 5 6 7 5 7 Full Rack Input Image Table 3 4 Rack 1 2 Rack Group Number
151. ator console is pressed a signal is sent to the attached input card on the I O rack which is connected to a PLC Communications Adapter Board that is set up in scanner mode PLC Communications Adapter Board in Scanner Mode Operator Console with Start button pressed RIO scanner input Logic Command Drive Running Logic Status To use the RIO scanner mode you need to do the following e Set the rack address of the RIO adapter channel s to 1 Choose which channel s you want to use RIO scanner on e Set the DIP switches appropriately DIP switch settings are covered in Chapter 2 Starting Up e Make sure that you are only trying to scan one logical rack of data Important Block transfer is not supported in RIO scanner mode Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter 4 Using DH Communications Chapter Objectives Chapter 4 provides the following information e DH features e block transfer message structures e DH command set DH Features You can configure either one or both channels for DH communications Configuration as a DH device allows the drive to look like a station on the DH link DH features include e 57 6K 115K and 230K baud communication rates e Parameter read and write messages for a block of parameters e A method similar to RIO block transfer that allows the PLC controller to issue drive messages via DH Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 4 2 Mess
152. ault 1 Rack fault Rck Flt Grp 4 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 6 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Inhibit Grp 0 0 Group 0 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 0 Inhibit Grp 2 0 Group 2 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 2 Inhibit Grp 4 0 Group 4 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 4 Inhibit Grp 6 0 Group 6 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 39 426 Channel A Remote I O Warning Select ChA RIOA Warn Sel adapter mode ChA RIOS Warn Sel scanner mode ChA RIOx Warn Sel dictates whether the PLC Communications Adapter Board will report a warning condition if a PLC controller RIO communications fault occurs at channel A ChA RIOx Warn Sel is not used if channel A is set up for DH communications Parameter Number 426 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value File Group 15 adapter or 255 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications 1 0 Fault Select S tatus When RIO adapter is used Enums Bits 7 4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bito Res Pgm Test FIt 36023 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Comm Loss Flt 36021 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Last State 0 Data zeroed 1 Last state Rack Inhibit Flt 36025 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Notused When RIO scanner is used Enums
153. blication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Setup Data F ull continued 7 63 Message Operation You can use the Setup Data Full function to load the set up information for a trend file in a single message instead of loading the individual parameters within the drive The following are the valid trend numbers This number Specifies that the command is to be sent for 409 4 rendd 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 Trend Status is ignored Trend Sample Size is ignored Post Samples specifies the number of samples that are taken once the trigger condition has been tripped or is forced One sample is used for the instance when the trigger becomes true Operator data specifies how to compare the two data values for the trigger condition Sample Time Rate specifies the rate of sampling data value An entry of 1 specifies 2 milliseconds Mode specifies whether a continuous trend or a one shot trend is performed If Comparison A Value is non zero the value specifies a constant value to use as Operand X You need to specify the Comparison A Value in internal drive units If Comparison A Value is zero Operand X is specified by Comparison A Link If Comparison A Link is non zero the value specifies the source parameter that is linked to the trend operand If Comparison A Link is zero Operand X is specified by Comparison A Value If Comparison B Value is non zero the value specifies a consta
154. c ChannelA ChannelA ChannelB Channel B High Low High Low Rev X XX AP Firmware UDP2 Rev x xx DP Firmware TP15 P16 TP17 TP18 TB21 1 Outl 2 Coml 3 Out2 4 Com2 5 Out3 6 Com3 7 Out4 8 Com4 9 Inl 10 Inl 11 In2 12 In2 13 In3 14 In3 15 In4 16 In4 17 10V 18 Com 19 10V 123456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10V 10V TP19 TP20 DP Status Channel A Status Channel B Status J5 Port1 SCANport J7 Port2 SCANport Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 6 Parameter Cross The following table lists the parameters in numerical order Reference By Number No Name Group Page No Name Group Page 300 Adapter ID 1 Adapter Info 6 12 344 Data OutA2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 301 Adapter Version 1 Adapter Info 6 12 345 Data OutB1 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 302 SP Comm Retries 1 Adapter Info 6 12 l 346 Data Out B2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 21 303 ChA DIP Switch 7 Channel A 6 12 347 Data OutC1 3 SCANport 0 6 21 304 ChB DIP Switch 8 Channel B 6 12 l 348 Data Out C2 3 SCANport 1 0 6 22 305 ChA LED State 7 Channel A 6 12 349 Data OutD1 3 SCANport 0 6 22 306 ChB LED State 8 Channel B 6 13 350 Data OutD2 3 SCANport 0 6 22 307 PLC Comm Status 1 Adapter Info 6 13 l
155. cale factor is applied allowing an effective digital range of 32767 16 x 2048 The absolute digital value is clamped at 32767 Scale Factor Drive Units 1 2048 2 4096 4 8192 16 32767 Parameter Number 399 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Factory Default 1 Minimum Value 16 Maximum Value 16 File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input 400 Analog Output 1 Offset Analog Out 1 Offset Analog Out 1 Offset determines the offset applied to the Analog Out 1 value after the scale factor is applied This allows you to shift the range of the analog output Parameter Number 400 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 20 Volts Maximum Value 20 Volts File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Output 401 Analog Output 1 Scale Analog Out 1 Scale Analog Out 1 Scale determines the scale factor or gain for the Analog In 1 value A 2048 value corresponds to a 10V output signal at TB21 The value sent linked to Analog Out 1 is scaled by the corresponding scale parameter before it is offset and converted to an analog signal Scale Factor Drive Units 1 32767 1 2 16383 1 4 8192 1 16 2048 Parameter Number 401 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Factory Default 1 Minimum Value all Maximum Value 1 File Group Communication I
156. cale function block that uses the following formula IN1 x MULTI DIV SR FF A set reset flip flop SUB A subtract function block that subtracts two signed numbers T FF A toggle flip flop function block that changes the state of the input 2ADD An add function block that adds two signed numbers UP DWN CNTR An up down counter function block that increments or decrements to a specified value in a specified amount of time 5 13 In addition each function block type also has parameters that are called I O nodes associated with them When you use a function block the I O nodes are created within the system These I O nodes are removed from the system when that function block is no longer in use In all the function block software can allow a total of 799 new node parameters in addition to the 493 linear parameters You can modify and manipulate the node parameters to meet the needs of your particular application Using the function block node parameters requires that you create a function block application A function block application is a combination of the function blocks that you want the drive to execute in the order that you want them executed Each function block within an application is called an event and you may have up to 128 events in your application To create your application you need to use a PC with the DriveTools DriveBlockEditor software a Bulletin 1201 Graphic Programming Terminal GPT or a PLC Once yo
157. can be seen in words 10 through 17 of the response message In addition word 23 is also returned in this format This word provides the units the parameter is defined in which in this example is RPM Word 18 contains the file group and element which are used to reference the parameter Words 19 through 21 contain the minimum maximum and default values of this parameter Data Format BTW BTR D j o R N10 90 768 iil A pa He ig 10 0 E Data File N10 100 sat seas Di on ii e a Ba 3276 ASCII Display Values These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 13 Parameter Write This message sent by the PLC Communications Adapter Board reads Parameter Value Write the 16 bit parameter data value for the parameter number selected PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length Header 4 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 31999 Word 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 769 Message OK 31999 Message Error Data Parameter Number Word 3 Data Parameter Value Word 4 Message Operation Parameter Number Parameter Value or Status Word The Parameter Value Write function specified in the BTW sends a new value specified in word 4 of the BTW header message to the parameter specified in the BTW header wor
158. cates the status of the response Message Operation The Warning Clear function specified in the BTW sends a warning fault handling request to the drive Word 4 of the BTW defines which handling option is requested e If word 4 has a value of 1 this message clears the last fault e If word 4 has a value of 2 this message clears the entire warning fault queue If an error has occurred in the request word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 30975 Word 4 of the BTR responds to the request of BTW word 4 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 24 Warning Clear Example continued In this example a Clear Fault Warning request was sent to the drive by putting a value of 1 in word 4 of the BTW Word 2 of the BTR indicated a successful clear by returning a value of 2048 Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 I 8 9 BTW f BTR f Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 25 Warning Queue The Warning Queue Read Full function reads the contents of the Warning Queue Read Full specified warning queue entry number A message is returned that includes the warning text and warning code associated with the specified warning queue entry and the time stamp associated with the fault PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 16 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header Word 1 Header W
159. cc cece eee eens Adjusting the Data Sample Rate cece eee Setting the Number of Post Samples 05 Setting the Buffer Type sist boa whe Sa wdea edad deg aay ae Forcing a Trigger ConditON s i cap sse rterisneriietnera stiis Using Cascading Trends css seks Sab atee dad ew ceawaree ae Looking atthe Results of the Trend cece cece eee ens Example Trends coud cen oda ateuedsehesb ada aE ARE na Specifications and Chapter 10 Supplemental Information Chapter Objectives ccccececvevceveeveveeeeevees Specifications ScspudesneAGeeenceaddeuiaduwnteeaeae sad Software Block Diagram issa ewaacae nwa sigvads dastawae amass Hardware Block Diagram asci c cewadied sis adeenieade cs Parameter Cross Reference ByNumber Parameter Cross Reference ByName 000005 PLC Communications Adapter Board DIP Switch Settings RIO Adapter With or Without Block Transfer DHF i b0 2k ck nie nan ee via dee p UAAR A dees RIO SCONE sc taas hid padia a pao e ete Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Notes Who Should Use this Manual What Is the PLC Communications Adapter Board Preface Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with this manual This preface covers the following topics e who should use this manual e an overview of the PLC Communications Adapter Board e the purpose of this manual terms and abbreviations e conventions used in this manu
160. channel A communications with the PLC controller Check for a break in the communications cable Verify that all connections are intact Clear the fault by issuing a Clear Fault or a Drive Reset command or by recycling power Check parameters 425 ChA RIO FIt Sel and 426 ChA RIO Warn Sel to determine the drive response to faults These parameters determine the resolution of the condition either fault warning or none Both parameters are bit coded e Bit 0 determines the resolution to ChA Res Pgm Test If bit 0 is set in parameter 425 a soft fault is logged If bit O is reset in 425 and bit 0 in parameter 426 is set a warning fault is logged If bit 0 is reset in 425 and 426 no action is taken eBit 1 determines the data output status of a fault If set to 0 zeros are transmitted If set to 1 the last state is transmitted Check parameter 436 ChA Fit Sts Bit 1 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in parameter 425 ChA RIO Fit Sel Check parameter 437 ChA Warn Sts Bit 1 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in parameter 426 ChA RIO Warn Sel Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 12 Fault text and code ChB Comm Loss 36022 Fault type Soft warning or none Description The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected a loss of channel B communications with the PLC controller Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Suggested actio
161. ck Transfer Error 3 11 Block Transfer Read Data Available 3 1 11 ck Transfer Read ock Transfer Wait 3 11 ock Transfer Write Available 3 11 ock Transfer Write In Progress 3 1 code definitions remote I O module 3 10 Stored File Data SW Malfunction 8 7 oo Oo w wW W W T terminal block locations 1 4 terms P 4 Trend Command Trend Parameter Definition 7 79 Trend Status 7 64 a Setup Parameter Values 7 1 Trends Block transfer functions All Info 7 65 Maximum Trend Size Available Number of Trends Available Run File Data 7 70 Setup Data Full 7 62 Stored File Datal 7 73 Trend Command Trend Parameter Definition 7 75 Trend Status Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Values 7 7 A Q J O Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Index Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 continuous 9 4 data sample rate 9 7 description of 9 3 9 4 example forcing trigger condition 9 4 one shot 9 operators available 9 5 Parameters Trend 1 Continuous Trigger 6 48 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X 6 46 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y Trend 1 Operator 6 47 Trend 1 Post Samples 6 47 Trend 1 Sample Rate 6 47 Trend 1 Select 6 48 Trend 1 Status 6 48 Trend 2 Continuous Trigger 6 50 Trend 2 Operand Parameter X Trend 2 Operand Parameter Y 6 49 Trend 2 Operator 6 49 Trend 2 Post Samples 6 50 Trend 2 Sample Rate 6 50 Trend 2 Select 6 50 Trend 2 Status T
162. cters of each word are returned in reverse order The user text string should read Press 8 Level 2 Data Format BTW sain Nga hota anh PP yy ly BTR 10 90 261 21072 21317 8275 8248 17740 17750 8268 Data File ASCII Display Values Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 42 User Text String This is a write message that stores in the drive your custom product User Text String Write name location text string which identifies the product The text string is 16 characters long PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 11 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 11 PLC Decimal Value 32507 Product Text Character 2 Character 1 Text Product Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 261 Message OK 32507 Message Error Character 4 Character 3 Product Text ter 6 Charac Product Text ter 8 Charac Product Text er 10 Charac Product Text er 12 Character 11 Product Text er 14 Character 13 Product Text er 16 Character 15 Message Operation The User Text String Write allows you to write a custom product identification string to the drive This string can be 16 ASCII characters long and is defined in the 8 words of the BTW You must enter the characters in the order shown with the first and second character of each word entered in opposite order as shown in
163. cts Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 8 Parameter Read The Scattered Parameter Value Read function reads a scattered list of Scattered Parameter Value Read parameters with each parameter you define You must also define the number of parameters to be read PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 5 63 words BTR instruction length 5 63 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 5 63 PLC Decimal Value 3 Number of Parameter Values to Read Parameter Number 1 Parameter Number 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 3 Message OK 32765 Message Error Number of Parameter Values to Read Parameter ain Number 1 Parameter Value or Status Word 1 Parameter aly Number 2 Parameter Value or Status Word 2 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 30 Bit 15 Parameter Value or Status Word 3 Data Word 62 Data Word 63 Parameter Data saad Number 30 Word 62 Parameter Value or Data Status Word 30 Word 63 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Scattered Parameter Value Read continued Message Operation The Scattered Parameter Value Read function specified in the BTW reads a pre defined group of parameter values in any order from the device Word 3 of the BTW data file defines the number of parameters to be read The parameters to be read and their order i
164. d This allows you to shift the range of the Maximum Value 20 Volts analog output File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Output 405 Analog Output 3 Scale Parameter Number 405 Analog Out 3 Scale Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog Out 3 Scale determines the scale factor or Factory Default 1 gain for the Analog In 3 value A 2048 value Minimum Value 1 corresponds to a 10V output signal atTB21 The Maximum Value 1 value sent linked to Analog Out 3 is scaled by the File Group Communication I O Analog Output corresponding scale parameter before it is offset and converted to an analog signal Scale Factor Drive Units 1 32767 1 2 16383 1 4 8192 1 16 2048 406 Analog Output 4 Offset Parameter Number 406 Analog Out 4 Offset Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 Analog Out 4 Offset determines the offset applied to Factory Default 0 the Analog Out 4 value after the scale factor is Minimum Value 20 Volts applied This allows you to shift the range of the Maximum Value 20 Volts analog output File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Output Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 35 407 Analog Output 4 Scale Parameter Number 407 Analog Out 4 Scale Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog Out 4 Scale determines the scale factor or Factory Default 1 gain for the An
165. d 3 The value must be in device units If an error has occurred e Word 2 of the response returns a value of 31999 e Word 4 contains a status code Example In this example a value of 4096 was sent to parameter 20 4096 is in drive units and indicates a value of 100 of rated drive volts as defined by parameter 147 Drive Rated Volts Data Format o i 2 3 a 5 7 S amp S 9 BTW N10 10 31999 20 4096 Data File BTR These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 14 Parameter Write The Continuous Parameter Value Write function writes to a Continuous Parameter Value continuous list of parameters beginning with the starting parameter Write number PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 5 64 words BTR instruction length 5 64 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 5 64 PLC Decimal Value 32767 Number of Parameter Values to Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 1 Message OK Word 2 32767 Message Error Number of Parameter Data Values to Write Word 3 Starting Parameter Data Number Word 4 Data Status Word Starting Parameter Number Value Number 1 Value Number 2 Value Number 3 Value Number 60 Data Status Word Word 6 Data Status Word Word 7 Data Status Word Word 64 Message Operation Th
166. d Only Source None None 32767 432767 Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 18 331 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 1 ChB RIOA In 1 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 1 scanner mode ChB RIOx In 1 contains the second word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3310 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size 332 Channel B Remote I O Input 2 ChB RIOA In 2 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 2 scanner
167. d Write Display Units Drive Units User Units Internal Drive Units Factory Default Drive Factory Setting Minimum Value Minimum Value Acceptable Maximum Value Maximum Value Acceptable File Group File and Group that Parameter Is In Enums Values Parameter Number Parameter Type Factory Default Display Units Drive Units Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group Enums Each parameter is assigned a number The number can be used for process display set up fault buffer interpretation or serial communications Two types of parameters are available Read Only The value is changed only by the drive and is used to monitor values Read Write The value is changed through programming This type can also be used to monitor a value This is the value assigned to each parameter at the factory These are the units that appear on the HIM display Two types exist ENUMS A language statement pertaining to the selection made or language description of bit function Engineering Standard units such as Hz seconds volts etc These are internal units used to communicate through the serial port and to scale values properly when reading or writing to the drive This is the lowest setting possible for the parameter This is the highest setting possible for the parameter This lists the File and Group where the parameter is located A parameter may be listed in more t
168. dapter Minimum Value 0 Board This is only present if channel B is defined to Maximum Value 7 adapter or 15 scanner be either RIO adapter or RIO scanner File Group Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select S tatus When RIO adapter is used Enums Bit2 Bitl Bito Enums Fault _______ Res Pgm Test ChB Res P gm Test F lt 36024 Comm Loss ChB Comm Loss Flt 36022 Rack Inhibit Rack Inhibit Flt 36025 When RIO scanner is used Enums Bit3 Bit2 Bitl BitO Enums Fault L Rck Fit Grp0 ChB GO Rack Flt Fit 36031 Rck Fit Grp2 ChB G2 Rack Fit Fit 36032 Rck Fit Grp4 ChB G4 Rack Flt Fit 36033 Rck Flt Grp6 ChB G6 Rack Fit FIt 36034 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 45 439 Channel B Warning Status ChB Warn Sts ChB Warn Sts lists the current warning conditions at channel B of the PLC Communications Adapter Board This is only present if channel B is defined to be either RIO adapter or RIO scanner Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 439 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 7 adapter or 15 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications 1 0 Fault Select S tatus When RIO adapter is used Enums Bit2 Bitl Bit0 Enums Warning L Res Pgm Test ChB Res Pgm Test F It 36024 Comm Loss ChB Comm Loss Flt 36022 Rack Inhibit Rack Inhibit Flt 36025 When RIO scanner
169. ddtiduouegieupsaceteuneciad weds Discrete Outputs Suv et ad acpeaeds anes netGuus eee 22 Discrete Inputs uarsra ecco camstod x ok aarath ds aa dewre Maer Analog VO Connections 2a vc acds deaaugatuensadeatesndbes Analog Inputs 2c ictceveaceeevcacdcadeawawadad seas Analog Outputs 23524240 ieiee esas aaesa tees ae yeee ws Determining Your Communications Configuration RIO Configuration for Both RIO Adapter and RIO Scanner DH Configuration ccc e cee ete eta eens Starting Up Chapter 2 Chapter Objectives cece eee eee eee ees Setting the DIP Switches 2 cece cece eet eee eens Setting Your Protocol wiccisivsavasdwevas da vadanne ws Setting Your Baud Rate 0 ccc ee eee eee Configuring the RIO Adapter Protocol cc ccc cece eens Specifying the Rack Size onunu Specifying the Last Not Last Group Scanned in Rack Specifying Whether You Are Using Redundant RIO Selecting the RIO Starting Group 0 05 Setting the RIO Rack Address 1 cece cece eens Configuring the RIO Scanner Protocol cece eee eee eee Specifying Whether One Full Rack Is Being Scanned Using the Remote I O Communications Using DH Communications Understanding the Resources of Your Drive Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Setting the Rack Configuration cc cece eee eae Configuring the DH Protocol cc ccc cece eee eens Setting Up t
170. e 10V The range of the offset parameter is 20V dc as shown in Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 Potentiometer with 10V Range to Control 0 to 100 Base Speed Velocity Reference 2 Hi Analog In 1 Multiplexer 10V Pot 0 0 0 0 10V 2048 2048 4096 Range of 20V OE EA oe E EESE E _ i N Potentiometer 10V 10V Digital Value 2048 0 2048 cale 0 Final Value Par 401 X2 0 X2 4096 4096 For Analog Input 2 a 0 to 10 volt potentiometer is used to adjust the Torque Reference from 100 to 100 To do this you need to adjust both the scale and offset parameters By linking Analog Input 2 to Torque Reference parameter 162 the potentiometer connected to Analog Input 2 becomes the Torque Reference Signal This signal must be scaled and offset to get the entire 100 in the 0 through 10 volt range A digital range of 8192 4096 must now be scaled for an analog range of 10 volts and must be offset so 5 volts on the potentiometer indicates 0 Torque Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 12 As shown in Figure 2 2 the offset voltage adds the corresponding digital value to the range In this case an offset of 5 volts adds a digital value of 1024 to the range This causes 0 volts on the potentiometer to register as 1024 digital internal to the drive and 10 volts on the potentiometer will be 1024 to the drive This can then be scaled by a factor of 4 8192 drive units so that 0 volts sends
171. e RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3350 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 336 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 6 ChB RIOA In 6 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 6 scanner mode ChB RIOx In 6 contains the seventh word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3360 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack
172. e attributes of the requested parameter The attributes for each parameter include the data minimum and maximum values and the parameter text The response message returns this information beginning with data word 4 The parameter text is returned with each data word containing two ASCII characters per word This data returns with the first and second characters in opposite order as shown in the following example If an error has occurred in the block transfer word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 32000 Example In this example a Parameter Read Full was performed through block transfer on a 1336 FORCE N10 10 shows the header message for the BTW The data is returned in the BTR data file starting with word 4 for parameter 101 Word 4 shows the present value in drive units Words 5 through 9 provide scaling information used to convert drive units to engineering units Words 10 through 17 provide the parameter name Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 12 Parameter Read Full This example shows the response message N10 90 through N10 112 continued in both binary and ASCII Note the ASCII information beginning with N10 99 The parameter name characters return in reverse order for each word N10 99 has the ASCII value of eV To read this invert the word to read Ve The next word space l inverted gives you space These words along with the following two words form the word Velocity The parameter name Vel Ref Hi
173. e device The time stamp is returned in the order shown in the header message This information should be viewed as ASCII text The Time is based on a 24 hour clock This field Indicates Seconds The seconds and tenths of milliseconds Date The date of the month in ASCII Day The day of the week where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Saturday Year The number of the year 1990 is referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Month The month of the year where 1 is January and 12 is December Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 52 Reference Time Stamp Data Read continued If an error occurs in the BTW a value of 29952 is returned in word 2 of the BTR response Example In this example a reference time stamp data read was requested through the BTW Word 2 of the BTW defines this request with a decimal value of 2816 for the PLC command code The BTR response indicates a successful request with a returned value of 2816 in BTR word 2 Words 4 through 7 then return the clock data The clock data indicates a time stamp of February 1995 the fifth day of the week Thursday and a date of 23 17 in ASCII The hour minutes and seconds change according to the time Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 N10 90 a 2816 a 7681 3594 5893 1282 BTW Data File BTR Data File N10 90 0E 01 OE 0A 17 05 05 02 S 1S f Hr Min Date Day YAMth ASCII Display Values Publication 133
174. e Continuous Parameter Value Write function specified in the BTW writes data values to a consecutive group of parameters beginning with the starting parameter number defined in word 4 of the BTW message The number of parameters to be written to is defined in word 3 of the BTW message If an error has occurred in writing to any of the values the BTR data file status word contains an error code If no error has occurred it returns a value of 0 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 15 Continuous Parameter Value Example Write continued In this example eight 1336 FORCE parameter values were written to starting with parameter 10 The eight parameter values are in device units Because all of the parameter values were accepted values of 0 were returned in the BTR status words Data Format 6 7 8 9 z e e EET FETT BTR Data File These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 16 Parameter Write The Scattered Parameter Value Write function writes to a list of Scattered Parameter Value Write parameters and returns the status of each parameter in its value location Parameter numbers do not need to be in consecutive order PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 5 63 words BTR instruction length 5 63 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 5 63 PLC Decimal Value 32765 Number of Pa
175. e Length 3 PLC Decimal Length 769 Parameter Number Parameter Number Parameter Value or Status Word Message Operation The Parameter Value Read function specified in the BTW reads a parameter value from the drive and places that value or an error code in word 4 of the BTR data file The value shown is in device units If an error has occurred e Word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 31999 e Word 4 contains the status code Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 5 Parameter Value Read Example continued In this example the value of parameter 20 was requested from a 1336 FORCE and a value of 4096 was returned 4096 is the internal drive unit value for the Maximum Rated Voltage Parameter This corresponds to a value of 100 drive rated volts in display units Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N10 10 3 769 20 N10 90 769 20 4096 These values vary depending on parameters and products BTW Data File BTR Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 6 Parameter Read The Continuous Parameter Value Read function reads a continuous Continuous Parameter Value list of parameters beginning with the starting parameter number Read You define the number of parameters to be read PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 5 64 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response
176. e SCANport analog input value that appears in parameter 338 SP Analog In Parameter Number 391 Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None 1 1 5 Communications 1 0 Analog Output ZERON 3 Port3 5 Port5 392 Analog Input 1 Offset Analog In 1 Offset Analog In 1 Offset determines the offset applied to the raw Analog In 1 values before the scale factor is applied This allows you to shift the range of the analog input Parameter Number 392 Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 0 20 Volts 20 Volts Communications 1 0 Analog Input 393 Analog Input 1 Scale Analog In 1 Scale Analog In 1 Scale determines the scale factor or gain for the Analog In 1 value A 10V dc signal applied to Analog In 1 at TB21 is converted to a 2048 digital value used by the 1336 FORCE Before the digital value is displayed or transferred to the drive the scale factor is applied allowing an effective digital range of 32767 16 x 2048 The absolute digital value is clamped at 32767 Scale Factor Drive Units 1 2048 2 4096 4 8192 16 32767 Parameter Number 393 Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 1 16 16 Communications 1 0 Analog Input 394 Analog Input 2 Offset Analog In 2 Offset Analog In 2 Offset determines the offset applied to the raw Analog In 2 values before the scale factor is applied This allows you to s
177. e date of the month high byte Valid values are Date 1 through 31 Day The day of the week low byte where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Saturday The number of the year high byte 1990 is Year referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Valid values are 0 through 99 The month of the year low byte where 1 is Moni January and 12 is December If the trend does not trigger and you send this request the PLC Communications Adapter Board returns the time when the drive first powered up Example In this example the trend triggered on Tuesday October 17 1995 at Data Format BTW 10 49 22 74 am 3 4 8 9 BTR z N10 90 7 4099 4096 22 74 10 49117 03 05 10 Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 70 Trend File The Run File Data function allows you to read the run time data Run File Data buffer within the drive for the specified trend file PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 35 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Data Word 4 Data Word 5 Data Word 34 Data Word 35 Message Length Header Word 1 Message Length 35 PLC Decimal Value 4100 Message OK 28668 Message Error Trend Number Data Sample 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 4100 Word 2 Trend Offset Header Numbe
178. e using this baud rate ee terminating resistor 57 6K 150 Ohm 115K 150 Ohm 230K 82 Ohm The following is the wiring configuration necessary for RIO scanner PLC Communications PLC Communications PLC Communications Adapter Board Adapter Board Adapter Board Channel A or B R2 Channel A or B 1 1 Shield Shield m Channel A or B Eai S lt Shield Ba 2 IKK KAK Blue Blue Shie Shield ld Blue Hose b Blue Hose Clea r Clear Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 You can connect up to four devices to a channel of a PLC Communications Adapter Board that is operating in RIO scanner mode These devices do not have to be other 1336 FORCE drives with PLC Communications Adapter Boards attached This wiring configuration shows three PLC Communications Adapter Boards attached to the PLC Communications Adapter Board in RIO scanner mode to show the wiring connections you would need PLC Controller R1 KAXI Clear Shield DH Configuration When you configure a communications channel for DH communications the PLC Communications Adapter Board becomes a station on the DH link You can pass information to and from the drive using the DH protoc
179. ect and the motor coasts to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required NORM STOP A normal stop signal specifies an NC maintained stop input that stops the drive according to the stop mode you specified using parameter 59 The drive responds the same way it would if the stop bit were set in any logic command When a stop signal is present the Norm Stop LED D7 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board is illuminated and the drive cannot run until the stop signal is removed EXT FAULT An Ext Fault signal allows you to wire an external signal into the 1336 FORCE If external fault input voltage is removed the External Fault LED D5 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board is illuminated The drive then issues a fault or warning based on the fault configuration defined by parameters 88 and 89 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Analog I O Connections N 5 10v 19 a COM 18 Ne I tov 17 J N IN4 16 No Z IN4 15 IN3 14 Ne 3 m 13 g N 6 IN2 12 NG F Was 11 NO INT 10 N 6 J meg COM4 8 Ne A out 7 y O COM3 6 N J me Q Ne J come 4 3 N O OUT 3 NS FJ coMt 2 NO OUT 1 _ G Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 You can access the analog I O connections at terminal block TB21 There are four analog inputs and four analog outputs Each of the analog I O parameter have scale and offset parameters The a
180. eed to contact Allen Bradley for technical assistance please review the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first If you are still having problems then call your local Allen Bradley representative A language module is located on each PLC Communications Adapter Board Catalog numbers identifying the language modules are as follows 1336T GT1EN 1336T Field Installed GTIEN English Version Blank Factory Installed GTIEN English Version GT1FR GTI1FR French Version GT1DE GT1DE German Version GT1IT GTIIT Italian Version GT1ES GTIES Spanish Version Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Notes Chapter 1 Installing and Wiring Your PLC Communications Adapter Board Chapter Objectives Chapter 1 provides information so that you can e mount the PLC Communications Adapter Board e configure and connect the communications e configure and set up the discrete inputs and analog I O Important The installation and wiring information in this manual is specific to the PLC Communications Adapter Board For information about mounting the drive connecting the motor leads or connecting the power refer to the 1336 FORCE user manual The following illustration shows the PLC Communications Adapter Board J 1 Control Board Interface Configuration DIP Switches BRAM Language Module J mperj3 Channel A Channel B Keyed Mounting Slot U2 U3 U4 U5 LANGUA MODULE i i 1336T GTIEN i k lt TA
181. ef Select A it13 Velocity Ref Select B Bi Velocity Ref Select B it14 Velocity Ref Select C Bi Velocity Ref SelectC it15 Reset Drive Bi Reset Drive ChB Logic Cmd In hannel B Parameter 368 Bi Ramp Stop Bi Start Bi ogl Bi Clear Fault Bi Forward Bi Reverse Bi 0g2 Bi Current Limit Stop Bi Coast Stop Bi Ramp Disable Bi Flux Enable Bi Process Trim Enable Bi Velocity Ref Select A Bi Velocity Ref Select B Bi Velocity Ref SelectC Bi Reset Drive Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 SCANport Logic Command Configuration Masks oar WwW N e ChA Logic Cmd In 367 ChB Logic Cmd In 368 5 5 This next figure shows the parameter interactions involved with the Logic Command Logic Command Word Par 52 Port Enable Mask Par 408 s Local Mask Par 415 o Start Mask Par 410 gt B Jog Mask Par 411 B Clear Fault Mask Par 413 gt B Direction Mask P ar 409 P CBA 000 No Change 001 ExternalRef1 010 PresetSpeed 1 011 PresetSpeed 2 100 PresetSpeed 3 101 PresetSpeed 4 110 PresetSpeed 5 111 External Ref 2 SCANport Default Reference Par 416 gt 8 Reference Mask Par 412 B Reset Drive Mask Par 414 B Stop Owner Par 369 Direction Owner P ar 370 Start Owner Par 371 Jog1 Owner Par 372 Jog2 Owner Par 373 Set Reference Owner Par 374 Local Owner Par 375 Flux Owner P ar 376 Trim Owner Par 377 Ramp Owner Par 378
182. efault None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size 354 Channel A Remote I O Output 3 ChA RIOA Out 3 adapter mode ChA B RIOA Out3 adapter mode with redundancy ChA RIOS Out 3 scanner mode ChA RIOx Out 3 contains the fourth word or data group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3540 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size 355 Channel A Remote I O Output 4 ChA RIOA Out 4 adapter mode ChA B RIOA Out4 adapter mode with redundancy ChA RIOS Out 4 scanner mode ChA RIOx Out 4 contains the fifth word or data group to the PLC controller
183. ence Select C it 15 Reset Drive Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 a fF O N 10 4 RIO Parameters ChA RIO Fault Select P ar 425 ChA RIO Warning Select Par 426 ChA Fault Status P ar 436 ChA Warning Status P ar 437 Redundant Channel Number P ar 427 Dip Switch Setup P ar 435 RIO Image Out from Drive RIO Image In to Drive ChA RIO In 0 Par 322 ChA RIO In 1 Par 323 ChA RIO In 2 Par 324 ChA RIO In 3 Par 325 hio ChannelA ChA RIO In 4 Par 326 ChA RIO In 5 Par 327 ChA RIO In 6 P ar 328 ChA RIO In 7 P ar 329 ChB RIO Fault Select P ar 430 ChB RIO Warning Select Par 431 RIO Image In to Drive ChB RIO In 0 ChB RIO In 1 ChB RIO In 2 RIO Channel B ChB RIO In 3 ChB RIO In 4 ChB RIO In 5 ChB RIO In 6 ChB RIO In 7 Par 330 Par 331 Par 332 Par 333 Par 334 Par 335 Par 336 Par 337 Analog I O Parameters Analog Input 1 gt Analog In 1 Offset Par 392 gt Analog In 1 Scale ChA RIO Out 0 ChA RIO Out 1 ChA RIO Out 2 ChA RIO Out 3 ChA RIO Out 4 ChA RIO Out 5 ChA RIO Out 6 ChA RIO Out 7 Par 351 gt Par 352 Par 353 Par 354 Par 355 Par 356 Par 357 Par 358 RIO Channel A ChB Fault Status P ar 438 ChB Warning Status P ar 439 RIO Image Out from Drive ChB RIO Out 0 Par 359 ChB RIO Out 1 P ar 360 ChB RIO Out 2 Par 361 ChB RIO Out 3 P ar 362 ChB RIO Out 4 P ar 363 ChB RIO Out
184. er data that does not require continuous updates To perform this function the PLC Communications Adapter Board provides a status word to the PLC during the normal discrete transfer scan This status word occupies the first module group in the PLC I O image table for the designated rack The PLC program then uses the status word to control the Block Transfer Write BTW and Block Transfer Read BTR functions of the PLC controller The descriptions provided in this chapter contain the configurations necessary to set up the data files in the block transfer instructions Header and data values depend on the operation to be performed Also included is a description of the status word that is returned from the drive and appears in the block transfer read header information Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 2 Block Transfer Status Word Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 In most cases header word 2 of the drive response contains a negative value bit 15 1 when a block transfer operation is not successful A status word is also usually returned and indicates the reason for the block transfer failure The location of the status word is typically header word 4 in the drive response but will vary depending on the message The following status word codes are defined i S Has the following meaning 0 No error occurred The service failed due to an internal reason and the 1 drive could no
185. ers Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input 339 Analog Input 1 Parameter Number 339 Analog In 1 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Analog In 1 displays the result of converting a 10V Factory Default 0 signal to a 32767 value using Analog In 1 Scale Minimum Value 32767 parameter 393 and Analog In 1 Offset parameter Maximum Value 32767 392 You can link this digital value to other 1336 File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input FORCE parameters 340 Analog Input 2 Parameter Number 340 Analog In 2 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Analog In 2 displays the result of converting a 10V Factory Default 0 signal to a 32767 value using Analog In 2 Scale Minimum Value 32767 parameter 395 and Analog In 2 Offset parameter Maximum Value 32767 394 You can link this digital value to other 1336 File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input FORCE parameters 341 Analog Input 3 Parameter Number 341 Analog In 3 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Analog In 3 displays the result of converting a 10V Factory Default 0 signal to a 32767 value using Analog In 3 Scale Minimum Value 32767 parameter 397 and Analog In 3 Offset parameter Maximum Value 32767 396 You can link this digital value to other 1336 FORCE parameters File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1
186. eter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter Number 456 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 327670 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rpm then Trl Opnd Parm Y s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 457 Trend 1 Operator Trl Operator Tr 1 Operator specifies the operator used for the trend trigger evaluation The available operators are Value Description 1 Greater Than GT 2 Less Than LT 3 Equals EQ 4 Not Equals NE 5 Logical AND AND 6 Logical NAND NAND 7 Logical OR LOR 8 Logical NOR NOR Parameter Number 457 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 5 Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 8 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 458 Trend 1 Sample Rate Trl Sample Rate Tr1 Sample Rate specifies the interval at which the data in the Trend In 1 parameter is sampled Itis programmable in 2 millisecond increments All values are rounded down to the nearest 2 millisecond interval Parameter Number 458 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Seconds Factory De
187. eter values to the 1336 FORCE If you try to write outside of this range you will get an error The 1336 FORCE interprets the values 1 through 493 as parameter numbers For example to write a value to parameter 119 Preset Speed 1 the MSG instruction would specify N10 119 with a size of one element A size of 10 will write to parameters 119 through 128 PLC TYPED READ N20 0 493 This request reads the status of the previous parameter writes N10 1 493 Ifa TYPED READ is specified with a PLC address of N20 0 the write status of all parameters from the last TYPED WRITE request N10 X XXX are OR ed together If one error has occurred during the last write operation this address contains the parameter number where the error occurred If multiple errors occurred the value is 1 and the PLC controller can request a TYPED READ of N20 1 493 to determine which parameters have had errors Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 4 4 Command PLC TYPED READ N30 0 493 Description This request translates into a read parameter full message in the 1336 FORCE Each parameter specified results in 20 words of data actual value minimum value maximum value descriptor and parameter text You can read a maximum of 50 parameters with this service if your PLC uses a file size of 1000 words If your PLC uses a different file size this service may take a different number of parameters PLC 5 TYPED READ
188. fault 0 020 Seconds Minimum Value 0 002 Seconds Maximum Value 30 Seconds File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 459 Trend 1 Post Samples Trl Post Samples Trl Post Samples specifies the number of data samples to be gathered once the trigger evaluation becomes true There is always a sample reserved for the instance when the trigger condition becomes true Parameter Number 459 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 499 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 48 460 Trend 1 Continuous Trigger Trl Cont Trigger Trl Cont Trigger specifies the type of trend You can choose either 0 for one shot or 1 for continuous With a one shot trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend stops With a continuous trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend continues looking for the next occurrence of a true trigger condition Parameter Number 460 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 461 Trend 1 Select Tr1 Select Tr1 Select specifies the trend mode The states are as follows 0
189. fined in word 3 of the header message The source parameter is returned in word 4 of the BTR If an error has occurred word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 30464 Example In this example the link associated with parameter 101 was requested from the drive The BTW header message word 4 defines the sink parameter of the requested link with a value of 101 The linked source parameter 330 is returned in word 4 of the BTR Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 BTW Data File BTR Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 30 Link Read The Continuous Parameter Link Read message returns a list of up to Continuous Parameter Link Read 60 parameters that are linked to each drive parameter in a consecutive list PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 5 64 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 4 Message OK 327664 Message Error Word 2 Number of Parameter Data Links to Read Word 3 Starting Parameter Data Number Word 4 Source Parameter Data Number 1 Word 5 Message Length PLC Decimal Value Number of Parameter Links to Read Starting Parameter Number Source Parameter Data Number 2 Word 6 Data Word Data Word Data Word Source Parameter Data Number 60 Word 64 Message Operation The request must specify the numbe
190. for more information about function blocks This term Has the following definition A link is a software connection between a linkable sink parameter and a source parameter You can use links to transfer data from the source parameter to a linkable sink parameter Your 1336 FORCE user manual provides a list of linkable sink parameters The PLC Communications Adapter Board allows up to 50 links in addition to 4 analog output links You can only program links when the drive is not running Links are stored in BRAM and established at power up BRAM recall and or system reset There are two types of links e User Link A user link is a software connection that you establish You can change these links as needed e Default Link A default link is a software connection between two parameters that is made when the drive is initialized The default links are shown here The links are made from the source side and the data transfer occurs in the opposite direction Links Default Links Sik S To C sure ChB RIO Out2 360 gt __ 0 56 X Logic Sts Lo ChB RIO Out 3 eI 4 _ To lt 269 gt Filtered Vel Fdbk ChB RIO Out4 C32 gt __ To gt lt 264 gt Motor Current Magn F dbk ChB RIO Out5 C383 __ To lt 265 gt Motor Volt Magn ChB RIO Out6 CD 0 _ 82 gt Computed Power ChB RIO Out 365 _ __ To _ lt 266 gt Stator Frequency ChB Logic
191. fset parameters as shown in Figure 2 3 Working in the opposite direction as the analog inputs apply the scale factor first The drive sends a 4096 digital value to indicate 100 velocity feedback for a total digital range of 8192 The meter having an analog range of 0 through 10V dc requires a digital range of 2048 This is done by applying a scale factor of 0 25 8192 x 0 25 2048 To have the 0 through 10V dc meter indicate 100 feedback you need to apply an offset Offset parameters for analog outputs will again add the corresponding digital value to the range In this case an offset of 5 volts adds a digital value of 1024 to the range This allows full range deflection on the 0 to 10 volt meter with 5 volts indicating zero speed Figure 2 3 Analog Output 1 100 Speed Indication 100 100 Base Speed 0 Speed Base Speed Filtered Velocity Feedback Analog Out1 Offset Par 269 Parao 20M8 iov 4096 100 SPEED 1024 2048 10V 100 Base Speed 0 0 1024 V 0 Speed 4096 100 SPEED 1024 0 OV 100 Digital Range From Drive 4096 0 4096 Scaled by 0 25 1024 0 1024 Offset by 5V Adding 1024 1024 1024 1024 Digital Value 0 0 2048 Meter Voltage 0 Volts 5 Volts 10 Volts BaseSpeed 100 0 100 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 14 Using the SCANport Capabilities Pre Configured Links Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 To communicate with external devices such
192. fy the DIP switch settings and Err Soft board DIP switch settings do execute a BRAM store to save the new 24026 not match values stored in settings BRAM The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected that No AP LM Exists Hard a language module has not been Reset the drive If the fault persists 25023 installed on the PLC replace the language module Communications Adapter Board SP Ptl Timeout Soft The device connected to Port 1 warning of SCANport has been None 26038 or none disconnected SP Pt2 Timeout Soft The device connected to Port 2 warning of SCANport has been None 26039 or none disconnected SP Pt3 Timeout Soft The device connected to Port 3 warning of SCANport has been None 26040 or none disconnected SP Pt4 Timeout Soft The device connected to Port 4 warning of SCANport has been None 26041 or none disconnected SP Pt5 Timeout Soft The device connected to Port 5 warning of SCANport has been None 26042 or none disconnected SP Comm Fault The integrity check on the board pee a ce amas Hard replace the PLC Communications 26043 hardware has failed Adapter Board SP Offline oa Excessive Communication eck ACANDO Ponner Honablos 26057 warning Srrors Replace terminal If fault persists or none replace PLC Comm Adapter Brd HW Malfunction The integrity check on the board aaa reas n acai Hard replace the PLC Communications 34001 hardware has failed Adapter Board HW Malfunction The integr
193. g is executing but the trigger Ewing 1 Stopped Z Runnihg pointhas not yet been reached 3 Trip Trig 4 Force Trip 3 Tripped Trigger Trending is executing and the trigger pointhas been reached 4 Tripped Forced The trigger point was forced Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 56 493 Trend Output 4 Trend Out 4 Trend Out 4 displays the latest 500 trend input data values once the trigger condition is true and all post samples are gathered This parameter is updated at the same rate as the data was sampled This parameter can be linked to Analog Output for example and a chart recorder connected to Analog Output to provide a hard copy of the trend data Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 493 Read Only Source None 0 32767 432767 Diagnostics Trend I O Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter Objectives Block Transfer Chapter 7 Block Transfer Services Chapter 7 provides the following information e a description of block transfer e a description of the block transfer status word e block transfer message structures PLC controllers use discrete transfer to transfer data to and from the PLC Communications Adapter Board during every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board transfers this data to and from the SCANport device PLC controllers use block transfer to transf
194. han one File and Group This lists the bit values that you can use and the associated meanings Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 12 300 Adapter ID Parameter Number 300 Adapter ID Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Adapter ID displays the identifier for the PLC Factory Default 1 Communications Adapter Board Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 1 File Group Diagnostics Info 301 Adapter Version Parameter Number 301 Adapter Version Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Adapter Version displays the current firmware Factory Default 2 XX version of the PLC Communications Adapter Board Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 9 99 File Group Diagnostics Info 302 SCANport Communications Retries Parameter Number 302 SP Comm Retries Parameter Type Read Source Display Units Drive Units None SP Comm Retries counts the number of Factory Default 0 communication retries for all entries in the SCANport Minimum Value 0 scan list Maximum Value 65535 File Group Diagnostics Info 303 Channel A DIP Switch Parameter Number 303 ChA DIP Switch Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits ChA DIP Switch displays the current DIP switch Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 settings for Channel A of the PLC Communications Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Adapter Board The two groups of numbers on the Maximum Value 1111 1111 11
195. he Analog I O 245 ceusacvecvsneeesuewalee ea ees Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Input Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Output Using the SCANport Capabilities 0 0 cece ee eee Pre Configured LIS i isc 0sirsdwitdwa wade aeadeeawe ean Chapter 3 Chapter Objectives ic ve ae caged be sede ae aed se Weds eae Understanding RIO Communications 0c cece eee Transferring Data Using Discrete Data Transfer 00 Discrete PLC Programming ccccceee ee ue eens SCGIING erai sanik ai aces eae eeaddaaeeeidateueeedas Discrete I O Program Example cece eee eens Transferring Data Using Block Transfer 000 008 Remote I O Module Status Word 20005 Data SOGE 36 perunaa a E ain hha ae a PLC 5 Block Transfer Rung Example oaaae Using RIO Redundant Mode aaa Using RIO Scanner Mode oaaae Chapter 4 Chapter Objectives aaau DAFFEAWUTES pacista Si 5a ate eia ak akaa aiid aa a A ika Message Instruction aa aaa DAC OMIM Set sa oar Gace cost cea aiian a aa a AA Chapter 5 Chapter Objectives 3 ccsuesnadaoeseudeawaealsavesniceos Using the SCANport Capabilities aaa aa Understanding the SCANport Logic Command Parameter Configuring the SCANport Controls cece cee eee Determining Function Ownership cee eee eeees Masking Control Functions cp due aaa Setting the Loss of Communications Fault auaa Viewing the SCANp
196. he fault queue e a fault queue entry number to indicate the position of the fault in the fault queue e a trip point TP to indicate which entry in the fault queue caused the drive to trip all faults which are displayed in the queue before the TP fault occurred after the TP was logged a five character decimal numbered fault code which is described later in this chapter e the time and date when the fault occurred e descriptive fault text plus all clear fault commands and when they were executed The 1336 FORCE monitors both internal and external operating conditions responding to conditions that you program as being incorrect Most malfunctions that occur will induce one of three types of faults Hard Faults Hard faults indicate that the 1336 FORCE has detected a malfunction where internal recovery is not possible Hard faults are the most severe type of faults Hard faults indicate that a major internal component or system has malfunctioned and that drive functions may be lost To recover from a hard fault you must either issue a Drive Reset command or recycle the drive power Soft Faults Soft faults exist to protect drive system components from internal and external malfunctions Unlike hard faults in most instances you can maintain drive control when a soft fault occurs Soft faults indicate that the 1336 FORCE has detected a malfunction that could damage drive control power components or the motor Soft faults may
197. he next figure shows the information contained in this status word Individual bits from this word are used in the PLC program to control the block transfer functions as shown in the block transfer examples in Chapter 7 Block Transfer Services EA TENTEA ENTENTE ENED EA CAER EATEN ER ENE Reserved for future use Block transfer ready BT READY Block transfer write in progress BTW IN PROG Block transfer read available BTR AVAIL Block transfer wait BT WAIT Block transfer error BT ERROR Block transfer write available BTW AVAIL Reserved for future use When in redundant mode specifies which channel is in control la T Write T Write Available tus Bit 15 T Wait tus Bi T Read tus Bit 1 in Progress Bit 11 lus DI If you receive this 3 11 status bit a The SCANport device and the PLC Block Transfer Ready Communications Adapter Board are Bit 10 communicating and are ready to process block transfers A block transfer write is in progress between the PLC controller and the ae ee PLC Communications Adapter Board Bit 11 This bit is cleared when the data transfer to the PLC Communications Adapter Board is complete Block Transfer Read The PLC Communications Adapter Data Available Board has data available for the PLC Bit 12 controller to read Block Transfer Wait ae PLE Comminmicalions eu Bit 13 Board is processing data This bit is cleared when the data is available
198. he rate of sampling data value An entry of 1 specifies 2 milliseconds Mode specifies whether a continuous trend or a one shot trend is performed If Comparison A Value is non zero the value specifies a constant value to use as Operand X You need to specify the Comparison A Value in internal drive units If Comparison A Value is zero Operand X is specified by Comparison A Link All Info continued 7 67 If Comparison A Link is non zero the value specifies the source parameter that is linked to the trend operand If Comparison A Link is zero Operand X is specified by Comparison A Value If Comparison B Value is non zero the value specifies a constant value to use as Operand Y You need to specify the Comparison B Value in internal drive units If Comparison B Value is zero Operand Y is specified by Comparison B Link If Comparison B Link is non zero the value specifies the source parameter that is linked to the trend operand If Comparison B Link is zero Operand Y is specified by Comparison B Value Sampling Input Parameter specifies the source parameter number that is linked to the Trend Input parameter Trend Output Parameter specifies the sink parameter number that the Trend Output parameter is linked to Example In this example the information for Trend 1 is read Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW l BTR N10 90 15 4098 4096 500 1 Data File N10 100 101 wae o 101 387 Publication 1336
199. hed 4 Tripped Forced The trigger point was forced 483 Trend Output 3 Parameter Number 483 Trend Out 3 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Trend Out 3 displays the latest 500 trend input data Factory Default 0 values once the trigger condition is true and all post Minimum Value 32767 samples are gathered This parameter is updated at Maximum Value 32767 the same rate as the data was sampled This parameter can be linked to Analog Output for example and a chart recorder connected to Analog Output to provide a hard copy of the trend data File Group Diagnostics Trend 1 0 484 Trend Input 4 Trend In 4 Trend In 4 specifies the data value to sample at the specified trend sample rate You should link Trend In 4 to a source parameter such as velocity torque or current for the trend to make sense Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 484 Read Write Sink Dependent on Link 0 327670 327670 Diagnostics Trend 1 0 These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rpm then Trend In 4 s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 54 485 Trend 4 Operand Parameter X Parameter Number 485 T
200. hen RIO adapter is used Enums Bits 7 4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bito Res Pgm Test Flt 36024 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Comm Loss Flt 36022 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Last S tate 0 Data zeroed 1 Last state Rack Inhibit F It 36025 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Notused When RIO scanner is used Enums Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bitod n Rck Fit Grp 0 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 2 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 4 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Rck Fit Grp 6 0 No rack fault 1 Rack fault Inhibit Grp 0 0 Group 0 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 0 Inhibit Grp 2 0 Group 2 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 2 Inhibit Grp 4 0 Group 4 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 4 Inhibit Grp 6 0 Group 6 not inhibited 1 Inhibit group 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 43 432 Channel B RIO Scanner Retries ChB RIOS Retries ChB RIOS Retries counts the number of communication retries for all entries in the scan list This is only active when RIO scanner mode is selected for channel B on the DIP switches Parameter Number 432 Parameter Type Read Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 File Group Communication 1 0 Channel B 435 DIP Fault Setup DIP Fault Setup DIP Fau
201. hift the range of the analog input Parameter Number 394 Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 0 20 Volts 20 Volts Communications 1 0 Analog Input Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 32 395 Analog Input 2 Scale Analog In 2 Scale Analog In 2 Scale determines the scale factor or gain for the Analog In 2 value A 10V dc signal applied to Analog In 2 at TB21 is converted to a 2048 digital value used by the 1336 FORCE Before the digital value is displayed or transferred to the drive the scale factor is applied allowing an effective digital range of 32767 16 x 2048 The absolute digital value is clamped at 32767 Scale Factor Drive Units Parameter Number 395 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Factory Default 1 Minimum Value 16 Maximum Value 16 File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input 1 2048 2 4096 4 8192 16 32767 396 Analog Input 3 Offset Parameter Number 396 Analog In 3 Offset Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units 4096 Analog In 3 Offset determines the offset applied to Factory Default 0 the raw Analog In 3 values before the scale factor is Minimum Value 20 Volts applied This allows you to shift the range of the Maximum Value 20 Volts analog input File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Input 397 Analog Input 3 Scale Parameter Number 3
202. ich portis presently Factory Default 0 issuing a Clear Fault command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners Enums Bitl Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 30 386 SCANport Analog Output SP Analog Out SP Analog Out passes the value it contains to the attached SCANport devices For example you can link one of the output parameters to SP Analog Out Parameter Number 386 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 and each of the five SCANport devices could read File Group Communications 1 0 Analog Output the value of the output parameter 387 Analog Output 1 Parameter Number 387 Analog Out 1 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog Out 1 converts a 32767 value to a 10V Factory Default 0 signal The digital value is linked to a 1336 FORCE Minimum Value 32767 source parameter which provides a value that is Maximum Value 32767 scaled and offset The results are converted to a File Group Communication 1 0 Analog Output voltage signal where 2048 results in a 10V output 388 Analog Output 2 Parameter Number 388 Analog Out 2 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units 32767 Analog Out 2 converts a 32767 value to a 10
203. ifferent message requests e BRAM Save saves parameter and link information from working memory or RAM to BRAM e EE Recall retrieves the last saved data from BRAM and places it in working memory or RAM e EE Default Initialize sets all parameter values and links to default in RAM without altering contents in BRAM If an error has occurred word 2 of the response returns a value of 31998 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 28 Save R ecall Initialize continued Example This example is requesting an EEPROM save Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW f BTR f These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 29 Link Read The Link Parameter Read message reads the source parameter Link Parameter Read number that is linked to the specified sink parameter PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2304 Message OK 30464 Message Error Message Length Header 3 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 2304 Word 2 Header Parameter Number Word 3 Sink Parameter Link Source Parameter Number Message Operation The Link Parameter Read function specified in the BTW reads the source parameter that is linked to the requested sink parameter de
204. ighth image word from Factory Default 0 the SCANport input image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 351 Channel A Remote I O Output 0 Parameter Number 3510 ChA RIOA Out 0 adapter mode Parameter Type Read Write Sink ChA B RIOA OutO adapter mode with redundancy see aad anns ee ChA RIOS Out 0 scanner mode Minimum Value 32767 ChA RIOx Out 0 contains the first word or data Maximum pale ene Panay group to the PLC controller input image table The File Group Conlin eens Cue gels data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size provide this value directly Other drive functions can NOTE If Channel A B is configured as RIOA w Block transfer this parameter is provide this value through a configuration link defined as a source parameter to prevent accidental linking and unpredictable Block Transfer behavior Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 352 Channel A Remote I O Output 1 Parameter Number _ 3520 ChA RIOA Out 1 adapter mode Parameter Type l Read Write Sink ChA B RIOA Outl adapter mode with redundancy ses een cmi i ChA RIOS Out1 sca
205. ilable if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size 326 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 4 ChA RIOA In 4 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 4 scanner mode ChA RIOx In 4 contains the fifth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3260 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size 327 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 5 ChA RIOA In 5 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 5 scanner mode ChA RIOx In 5 contains the sixth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardles
206. in File B3 of the PLC controller are used to set the drive logic control bits and integer file N10 word 01 is used to store the drive speed reference To control the logic operation of the drive the PLC program must control the bits in the output image table that correspond to the desired operation Because parameter 331 in the previous figure has been linked to parameter 367 and parameter 331 is associated with group 1 in the output image table the PLC controller program is controlling bits in word 0 21 3 9 Start Rung 1 B3 0 21 E 01 bit 1 par 367 Stop Rung 2 B3 0 21 02 bit 8 B3 par 367 03 Current Limit Stop Ramp Rung 3 B3 0 21 Disabled 0 bit 9 i par 367 Speed Reference Select Rung 4 B3 B3 0 21 S E i parer 7 Select E pa PS ae Select E Ea Fault Reset a ee o Clear Fault parser Run Speed Reference Rung 6 B3 N10 01 0 22 In this example word 1 of integer file N10 stores the speed reference for the drive The MOV block in rung 6 of the example PLC program transfers the 16 bit word N10 01 to word 2 of the output image table Because word 2 of the output image table is sent to parameter 332 which in turn is linked to parameter 101 the 16 bit word N10 01 is the speed reference input to drive parameter 101 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 10 Transferring Data Using Block Transfer Bit Publication 1336 F
207. ion for equivalent number 8760 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair shielded 8770 0 750 mm 18 AWG 3 conductor shielded 9460 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair shielded Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Discrete I O FAULT NO 10 FAULT COM 9 FAULT NC 8 7 INPUT COM 6 5 EXT FAULT N C 4 NORM STOP N C 3 MOTOR THERMO N C 2 DRIVE ENABLE N O 1 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Terminal block TB20 provides the discrete I O capabilities Discrete Outputs Fault outputs from the 1336 FORCE are supplied at terminal block TB20 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board Fault outputs provide warning or fault signals based on drive status The Fault NC Fault Com and Fault NO outputs are relay contacts that provide fault signals If a contact is closed energized then there is no fault If a contact is open there is a fault The following values are the contact ratings for the Fault NC Fault Com and Fault NO relays 2A at 115V ac 2A at 30V dc The typical digital output connections can be shown as follows TB20 H FAULTN 0 DIGITAL oun o FAULT COM DIGITAL OUT O Y FAULTN C DIGITAL oun o Discrete Inputs Discrete inputs to the 1336 FORCE are supplied through the PLC Communications Adapter Board at terminal block TB20 Discrete inputs enable and stop the drive as well as providing checks on drive and motor
208. ion specified by Operator is true then the trend is triggered and the PLC Communications Adapter Board begins to write data in the Trend Output parameter once all post samples have been gathered at the same rate as the data was sampled You should generally link Operand X to a parameter while Operand Y can be either a constant or a link to another parameter Important You should make sure that you are comparing either both signed parameters or both unsigned parameters Trying to compare a signed parameter to an unsigned parameter could cause unexpected results Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The following operators are available This Operator Compares GT The data value for Operand X to the data value for Operand Greater Than Y If the comparison is true the trend is triggered LT The data value for Operand X to the data value for Operand Less Than Y If the comparison is true the trend is triggered EQ The data value for Operand X to the data value for Operand Equal Y If the comparison is equal the trend is triggered NE The data value for Operand X to the data value for Operand Not Equal Y If the comparison is not equal the trend is triggered Operand X to a 16 bit mask value in Operand Y If all the AND bit s in Operand X corresponding to the the bit s set in Operand Y are 1 s then the trigger condition is true Operand X to a 16 bit mask value in Operand Y Ifall the N
209. iption of the pre configured links The PLC Communications Adapter Board contains four switches that you use to select the communications options for each channel Use switches U2 and U3 to configure channel A and switches U4 and U5 to configure channel B The standard configuration is to configure channel A for DH and channel B for RIO adapter Changes to switch settings will not take effect until power is re applied ATTENTION Use a blunt pointed instrument such as a ball point pen to set DIP switches Do not use a pencil Pencil lead graphite may damage switch assemblies ATTENTION The PLC Communications Adapter Board uses both input and output image table words for drive control The PLC Communications Adapter Board is not compatible with complementary I O configurations Failure to check connections and switch settings for application compatibility when configuring the PLC Communications Adapter Board could result in personal injury and or equipment damage due to unintended or undesirable drive or process equipment operation The start up procedure for the PLC Communications Adapter Board depends on the communications protocol that you are using Regardless of which protocol you are using you need to set the protocol and baud rate Once you have set the protocol and baud rate follow the procedure for the protocol you chose for that channel A or B If you encounter any operating faults once switch settings have been a
210. ity check on the board Res AS GRE e sea Ja Hard replace the PLC Communications 34002 hardware has failed Adapter Board HW Malfunction The integrity check on the board Posertke deve He Tanit san Hard f replace the PLC Communications 34003 hardware has failed Adapter Board HW Malfunction Hard The integrity check on the board Pa S 34004 hardware has failed P Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Adapter Board Fault text and Fault 8 9 code type Description Suggested action HW Malfunction The integrity check on the board oe Tae ues ate Hard replace the PLC Communications 34005 hardware has failed Adapter Board Thee See tei sein es alee Verify the DIP switch settings for ChA Rack Config that more than one full rack Hard channel A RIO scanner can only scan 34006 should be scanned This fault is P one full logical rack per channel specific to RIO scanner aa a e Verify the DIP switch settings for ChB Rack Config that more than one full rack Hard channel B RIO scanner can only scan 34007 should be scanned This fault is ba one full logical rack per channel specific to RIO scanner Check parameter 303 DIP switch ChA and verify the DIP switch settings The PLC Communications Channel A High sw3 sw4 ChA Module Adapter Board has detected a Module 0 Off Off Group Hard channel A module group that is Module 2 Off On 34012 not valid for the selected rack Module 4 O
211. l 222eseeegaeeeaddardasidaveeee eda PINTO tn maien mai deste ee al tee Ate adh Achat tits a Tigger TME ts fia as acd key eee Sn ae as Run File Datel sirry io euti atia wean Aout E a Stored File Data naaa aaaea Trend Parameter Definition 0 aaa Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Values 000 eee Troubleshooting Chapter 8 Chapter ODjettvesS cauetcdoisedddntegiduedodiadwgwe ward Fa ltand Status LEDS c cweseceke deca nob ede sews adeiw cae Application Processor AP Status DlandD2 Domino Processor DP Status D3 andD6 PLC Communications Adapter Status D4 D5 D7 D9 and D11 Channel A Status D8 D10 and D12 Channel B Status D13 D14 andD15 0 Fault QUEUES sc ivetedidusmedghurtuseesuntobsrundteens col Se ee eee ee eee eee ee kee E Hard PUI i diss cig dorta tee bob uae a aed weet SOME AUIS lt areeigas beat hea eee cans obs 2 yan dee Sams Warning Faults 18 00 48 bde od al ddede a NO POU votaee ews mosini medra nip eed aee aa eee Fault Code DeSCHPHONS s cas stews ie teen amadanani aes Fault Displays sw etecmaneuud chew we dakeae be wa pae Sep obes Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Using the Trend Features Chapter 9 Chapter Objectives 0 ccc eee eee eee ees Using Trend Parameters cece cece e eee e eens Understanding How Trending Works 0c cece eee ees Setting Up the Trigger Point 0 cece eee eee ees AND NAND OR and NOR c
212. le if you set up channel B for DH Availability also provide this value directly Other drive functions can depends on the selected rack size provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 365 Channel B Remote I O Output 6 Parameter Number _ 3650 ChB RIOA Out 6 adapter mode Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None ChB RIOS Out 6 scanner mode Factory Default None ChB RIOx Out 6 contains the seventh word or data Minimum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The Maximum Value 32767 data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack File Group Communications I O Channel B scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also provide this value directly Other drive functions Can depends on the selected rack size provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 366 Channel B Remote I O Output 7 Parameter Number 3660 ChB RIOA Out 7 adapter mode Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None ChB RIOS Out 7 scanner mode Factory
213. lt Setup indicates which DIP switch faults the PLC Communications Adapter Board has encountered Bit13 Bit11 Bit8 Bit5 Bit3 Bit2 Bitod L Bits 1 4 6 7 9 10 and 12 are not used Parameter Number 435 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group Diagnostics Info Enums Fault ChA Rack Set ChA Rack Config Flt 34006 ChA Redundnt Redund Diff Prot F It 34015 ChA Mod Grp ChA Module Group FIt34012 ChA Dup Node ChA Dup Nodeaddr F It 36019 ChB Rack Set ChB Rack Config FIt 34007 ChB Mod Grp ChB Module Group Flt 34013 ChB Dup Node ChB Dup Nodeaddr F It 36020 436 Channel A Fault Status ChA Fault Sts ChA Fault Sts lists the current fault conditions at channel A of the PLC Communications Adapter Board This is only present if channel A is defined to be either RIO adapter or RIO scanner Parameter Number 436 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units Bits Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 7 adapter or 15 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communications I O Fault Select S tatus When RIO adapter is used Maximum Value File Group Enums Bit2 Bitl Bit0 Enums Fault Res P gm Test ChA Res P gm Test F It 36023 Comm Loss ChA Comm Loss Flt 36021 Rack Inhibit Rack Inhibit Flt 36025 When RIO sc
214. lues 0E 01 OE OA 17 05 05 02 S 1S_ HAMin Date Day Yr Mth Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 46 Clock Data The Real Time Clock Data Write message is provided to allow the Real Time Clock Data Write drive to write the specified real time clock data This allows you to write the new real time clock seconds minutes and hours as well as the day date month and year PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 7 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value Message Length 7 PLC Decimal Value 2816 2816 Message OK 29952 Message Error Clock Time Seconds 10ths of MS Clock Time Hour inute Clock Time Date Day Time Clock Year Month Message Operation Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 The Real Time Clock Data Write function allows you to define the clock data for the drive The clock time is written in the order shown in the header message This information should be sent as ASCII text The Time is based on a 24 hour clock Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Real Time Clock Data Write continued 7 47 This field Indicates Seconds The seconds and tenths of milliseconds Date The date of the month in ASCII The day of the week where 1 is Sunday and 7 is Day Saturday Year
215. me Stamp Data Read Reference Time Stamp Data Write 7 53 RIO communications channel A See channel A channel B See channel B channel configuration choosing protocol 2 2 description of 3 1 3 2 discrete PLC programming 3 7 es ai for discrete data transfer 3 3 2 rate of discrete data transfer 3 2 RIO specific parameters 3 2 starting group 2 4 using block transfer _3 14 RIO redundant mode eee choosing the protocol DIP switch reference 10 14 how to use 3 20 setting rack allocation 2 Run File Data Run Time Accumulator Data Read 7 49 RIO scanner N S scaling 2 11 scanner See RIO scanner SCANport accessing ports 3 4 and 5 analog I O parameters 5 10 configuring controls 5 54 5 8 control ownership 5 4 disabling control functions enabling control functions image 5 4 Logic Command parameter 5 1 logic evaluation block 5 4 loss of communications fault masking functions Local Mask 5 Port Enable 5 4 receiving analog input 5 14 Index l 5 using the capabilities 2 14 viewing fault warning status Scattered Parameter Link Read Scattered Parameter Link Write 7 37 Scattered Parameter Value Read 7 4 Scattered Parameter Value Write securing the PLC Communications Adapter Board 1 4 setting your input voltage 1 4 Setup Data Fulll 7 64 software block diagram 10 3 specifications L0 1 start up procedure status LEDs status word Blo
216. mmunications 1 0 SCANport Masks Enums Bit1 Portl Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit 4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 36 411 Jog Mask Parameter Number 411 og Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits J og Mask controls which ports can issue a jog Factory Default 0 command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications I O SCANport Masks Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit 4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B 412 Reference Mask Parameter Number 412 Ref Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Ref Mask controls which ports can select an Factory Default 0 alternate reference or preset speed Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communication I O SCANport Masks Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit 4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 413 Clear Fault Mask Parameter Number 413 Cir Fault Mask Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Clr Fault Mask controls which ports can generatea Factory Default 0 clear fault command Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OFE Hex File Group Communications I O SCANport Masks Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit 4 Port4 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB 414 Reset Drive Mask P
217. mode ChB RIOx In 2 contains the third word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3320 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size 333 Channel B Remote 1 0 Input 3 ChB RIOA In 3 adapter mode ChB RIOS In 3 scanner mode ChB RIOx In 3 contains the fourth word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3330 Parameter Type Read Only Source
218. n Check for a break in the communications cable Verify that all connections are intact Clear the fault by issuing a Clear Fault or a Drive Reset command or by recycling power Check parameters 430 ChB RIO Fit Sel and 431 ChB RIO Warn Sel to determine the drive response to faults These parameters determine the resolution of the condition either fault warning or none Both parameters are bit coded e Bit 0 determines the resolution to ChB Res Pegm Test If bit 0 is set in parameter 430 a soft fault is logged If bit O is reset in 425 and bit 0 in parameter 431 is set a warning fault is logged If bit 0 is reset in 430 and 431 no action is taken eBit 1 determines the data output status of a fault If set to 0 zeros are transmitted If set to 1 the last state is transmitted Check parameter 438 ChB FIt Sts Bit 1 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in parameter 430 ChB RIO Fit Sel Check parameter 439 ChB Warn Sts Bit 1 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in parameter 431 ChB RIO Warn Sel Fault text and or Description code ChA Res Pgm Test 36023 Fault type Soft warning or none The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected the PLC controller being switched from the run mode to another mode 8 13 Suggested action Check the PLC mode switch and the T O control reset Clear the fault by issuing a Clear Fault or a Drive Reset command
219. n On On On On Off Off Off Off Off On Off On Off On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off On Off On Off On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off On Off On Off On On On On On On On On On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On DIP Switches U2 Channel A or U4 Channel B RIO Rack Address 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 71 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 14
220. n Gel kak es a Full Rack Do Not Link eee 1 2 Rack 1 4 Rack Block Transfer 359 8 a gt gt m ia gt 55 ome lt lt 35 gt FX gt i B lt __ Do Not Link Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 6 The following figure shows an example of the PLC Communications Adapter Board that uses RIO communications without block transfer Notice that you can use the first module group number PLC Controller 1336 FORCE Output Image Table Group Number Full 3 4 12 0 2 0 2 4 13 135 2 4 2 4 16 3 5 3 5 7 4 6 5 7 YOU BWNH O 14 0 21416 1 3 5 7 Input Image Table Group Number Full 34 12 0 0 2 0 2 4 1 13 18 5 2 2 4 2 4 6 3 3 5 35 7 4 4 6 5 5 7 6 7 u4 0 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 PLC Communications Adapter Board Channel B Drive Parameters m 200 a EEN ser e Configurable Links z _ 33 iSO a a as SO a a ea A a Full Rack 3 4 Rack 1 2 Rack 1 4 Rack 0 ash e a fe UUO gt eo OB n Ce Links Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 PLC 3 7 Discrete PLC Programming The following figure shows an application where the PLC Communications Adapter Board has been set up for a full rack numbered rack 2 and the PLC controller program is using the 16 bit words for groups 1 and 2 for data transfer with the
221. n Off size Module 6 On On Reset the drive If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board Check parameter 304 DIP switch ChB and verify the DIP switch settings The PLC Communications Channel B High sw3 sw4 ChB Module Adapter Board has detected a Module 0 Off Off Group Hard channel B module group thatis Module 2 Off On 34013 not valid for the selected rack Module 4 On Off size Module 6 On On Reset the drive If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 10 Fault text and code Redund Rack Size 34014 Fault type Hard Description The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected different rack sizes for channels A and B when RIO with redundancy was selected Suggested action Check parameters 303 and 304 DIP Switch ChA and DIP Switch ChB Verify the DIP switch settings Both channels must have the same rack size Channels A B LOW 1 4 rack sw5 sw 6 Off Off 1 2 rack Off On 3 4 rack On Off Full rack On On Note Full racks can only have the Last Not Last switch set to Off Reset the drive If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board Redund Diff Prot 34015 Hard The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected redundant operation has been called for but channel A is not configured for the RIO protocol Check parameters 303 and 304 DIP Switch ChA a
222. n On On On DH DIP Switches U2 Channel A or U4 Channel B DIP Switches U3 Channel A or U5 Channel B SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Protocol DH On Off Baud Rate 57 6K Off Off 115 2K Off On 230 4K On Either Not Applicable na na na na na na DH Station Address 00 Off Off Off Off Off Off 01 Off Off Off Off Off On 02 Off Off Off Off On Off 03 Off Off Off Off On On 04 Off Off Off On Off Off 05 Off Off Off On Off On 06 Off Off Off On On Off 07 Off Off Off On On On 10 Off Off On Off Off Off 11 of off On of off On 12 Off Off On Off On Off 13 Off Off On Off On On 14 Off Off On On Off Off 15 Off Off On On Off On 16 Off Off On On On Off 17 Off Off On On On On 20 Off On Off Off Off Off 21 Off On Off Off Off On 22 Off On Off Off On Off 23 Off On Off Off On On 24 Off On Off On Off Off 25 Off On Off On Off On 26 Off On Off On On Off 27 Off On Off On On On Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 13 DIP Switches U3 Channel A or U5 Channel B Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off Off Off On Off On Off On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off On Off On Off O
223. nalog inputs can be linked to any linkable sink parameter and the analog outputs can receive information from any parameter in the drive The drive increments the analog I O every two milliseconds Analog Inputs The PLC Communications Adapter Board has 4 analog inputs that have a range of 10V and a digital resolution of 12 bits These inputs are differential inputs with noise rejection filtering Each input has a gain and offset adjustment The A D converter is a 12 bit device where an input value of 10V results in a digital value of 2048 Likewise an input value of 10V results in a digital output value of 2048 Chapter 2 Starting Up describes the parameters associated with scaling analog values For an analog input to control a function you need to 1 Link the analog input parameter s to a parameter such as velocity reference 2 Set up the scale and offset parameters associated with that analog input parameter The typical analog input connections for unidirectional operation are shown as follows 10V DC POWER SUPPLY COM POWER SUPPLY COMMON Co Either 17 or 19 ONLY ONE 10V DC POWER SUPPLY rot I ot 1 IN ANALOG IN Li HAr OT Ho 5 UM ADC I I ot IN ANALOGIN e Note Connect to Only One Set of Inputs IN4 and IN4 IN3 and IN3 TOTE IN2 and IN2 SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK IN1 and IN1 1 7 The typical analog input connecti
224. nd DIP Switch ChB Verify the DIP switch settings Both channels must be configured for the RIO protocol when using the redundant mode Channel A LOW sw8 Non redundant Off Redundant On Channel B LOW RIO w o Blk Trans Off RIO w Blk Trans Off On DH On RIO scanner On On If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board swl SW Malfunction 34016 Hard The integrity check on the board software has failed Reset the drive If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board ChA Dup Nodeaddr 36019 Soft The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected a duplicate channel A DH node address Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Check parameter 303 DIP Switch ChA and refer to the table in Chapter 2 to verify the DIP switch settings Reset the drive If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board 8 11 Fault text and code ChB Dup Nodeaddr 36020 Fault type Soft Description The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected a duplicate channel B DH node address Suggested action Check parameter 304 DIP Switch ChB and refer to the table in Chapter 2 to verify the DIP switch settings Reset the drive If the fault persists replace the PLC Communications Adapter Board ChA Comm Loss 36021 Soft warning or none The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected a loss of
225. nd operation e understanding function blocks e using system resources You can make some changes to the default configuration to customize the way SCANport works for you This section covers the following topics e understanding the logic command parameter e configuring the SCANport controls e setting the loss of communications fault e viewing the SCANport faults and warnings e using the SCANport image e setting the analog I O parameters Understanding the Logic Command Parameter The Logic Command parameter parameter 52 on the 1336 FORCE is modified by receiving input from ChA Logic Cmd In ChB Logic Cmd In and SCANport devices 1 through 5 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board To use these parameters effectively you need to understand how the Logic Command parameter works Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 2 P367 P368 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The Logic Command provides information about what functions are currently executing You can access the individual bits of the Logic Command to find information about these functions This Identifies this This Identifies this bit function bit function 0 Ramp Stop 8 Coast Stop 1 Start 9 Ramp Disable 2 Jogl 10 Flux Enable 3 Clear Fault 11 Process Trim Enable 4 Forward 12 Velocity Ref Select A 5 Reverse 13 Velocity Ref Select B 6 Jog2 14 Velocity Ref Select C 7 Current Limit Stop l 15 Rese
226. nfiguration The number of elements in this group will vary depending on how you configure the channels Redund Chan is only available in redundant RIO configuration Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Velocity Ref Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Jog Speed 1 Jog Speed 2 Vel Ref 1 Low Vel Ref 1 Hi Vel Ref 2 Low Vel Ref 2 Hi Vel Scale Fctr 1 Vel Scale Fctr 2 Vel Trim Low Vel Trim Hi Vel Ref Out Low Vel Ref Out Hi Accel Time Decel Time Fwd Speed Limit Rev Speed Limit Max Rev Spd Trim Max Fwd Spd Trim Droop Percent Vel Ref TP Sel Vel Ref TP Low Vel Ref TP Hi SP Default R ef 416 Logic ChA Logic Cmd In ChB Logic Cmd In Logic Command Torg Stop Confg Logic Options Logic Status Low Logic Status Hi At Setpoint 1 At Setpoint 2 Over Setpoint 1 Over Setpoint 2 Over Setpoint 3 Over Setpoint 4 Setpoint Select Speed Setpnt Tol Cur Setpoint Tol Zero Speed Tol Local In Status Stop Dwell Local Out Status Logic Tstpt Sel Logic Tstpt Data File 3 Velocity Torque 367 368 52 58 59 56 57 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 54 12 55 71 70 Velocity Fdbk Filt Vel Fdbk Vel Feedback Scaled Vel Fdbk Enc Pos Fdbk Low Enc Pos Fdbk Hi Fdbk Track Gain F dbk Filter Gain F dbk Filter BW Fdbk Device Type Fdbk Filter Sel Tach Velocity Error Filter BW Vel Fdbk TP Sel Vel Fdbk TP Low Vel Fdbk TP Hi 269 146 147 148 149 151 153 154
227. nformation for the PLC Communications Adapter Board e explains the procedures you need to mount and configure your PLC Communications Adapter Board e describes the available parameters and block transfer instructions e provides information to help you troubleshoot your PLC Communications Adapter Board Contents of this Manual This manual contains the following information Title Preface Contents Describes the purpose background and scope of this manual as well as an overview of this product Installing and I Wiring Your PLC Provides procedures for installing and wiring your PLC Communications Communications Adapter Board Adapter Board 2 Starting Up Provides information for starting up your system Provides information about using RIO communications 3 Using RIO with the PLC Communications Adapter Board This Communications chapter includes sections on redundant RIO mode and RIO scanner mode 4 Using DH Provides information about using DH communications Communications with the PLC Communications Adapter Board Understanding the g Provides an overview of the function block software and 5 Resources of Your the available system resources Drive Provides information about the parameters that are 6 Parameters p o ior specific to the PLC Communications Adapter Board 7 Block Transfer Provides information about the block transfer Services instructions Explains how to inter
228. nner mode Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 A RI t1 th d or data CARRO ON cones KO Secon NON UTA File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 23 353 Channel A Remote I O Output 2 ChA RIOA Out 2 adapter mode ChA B RIOA Out2 adapter mode with redundancy ChA RIOS Out 2 scanner mode ChA RIOx Out 2 contains the third word or data group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3530 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory D
229. nostics Info Enums 0 Off 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 Flash Green 5 Flash Red 307 PLC Communications Board Status Parameter Number 307 PLC Comm Status Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None PLC Comm Status displays the status of the PLC Factory Default 0 Communications Adapter Board You can use this Minimum Value 0 parameter to determine if no fault occurred or if a Maximum Value 3 warning soft fault or hard fault occurred File Group Diagnostics Info Enums 0 NoFaultt 1 DrWarning 2 DrSoftFlt 3 DrvHard Flt 309 Language Select Parameter Number 309 Language Sel Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None You can use Language Sel to choose the language Factory Default 0 you want the PLC Communications Adapter Board Minimum Value 0 to use for parameter and fault display text Maximum Value 1 Currently only English is available File Group Startup Drive Data Group Diagnostics Info Enums 0 English 1 Alternate Language not currently available 314 Data Input A1 Parameter Number 314 Data In A1 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In A1 contains the first image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 315 Data Input A2 Parameter Number 315 Data In A2 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In A2
230. ns 1 0 SCAN port Owners Bit1 Port1 Bit5 Port5 Enums Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit4 Port4 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 28 370 Direction Owner Dir Owner Dir Owner displays which port currently has exclusive control of direction changes Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 370 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 OFE Hex File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners Enums Bit1 Port1 Bit5 Port5 Bit2 Port2 371 Start Owner Start Owner Start Owner displays which ports are presently issuing a valid Start command Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 371 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 OFE Hex File Group Communications I O SCAN port Owners Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit5 Port5 Bit2 Port2 372 Jogi Owner IJ og1 Owner J og1 Owner displays which ports are presently issuing a valid J og1 command Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value 372 Read Only Source Bits 0 0 OFE Hex Bit3 Port3 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 Channel B Bit3 Port3 Bit6 ChannelA Bit 7 ChannelB File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port Owners Enums Bit 1 Port1 Bit2 Port2 Bit3 Port3 Bit5 Port5 Bit6 Ch
231. nt value to use as Operand Y You need to specify the Comparison B Value in internal drive units If Comparison B Value is zero Operand Y is specified by Comparison B Link If Comparison B Link is non zero the value specifies the source parameter that is linked to the trend operand If Comparison B Link is zero Operand Y is specified by Comparison B Value Sampling Input Parameter specifies the source parameter number that is linked to the Trend Input parameter Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 64 Setup Data F ull continued Trend Output Parameter specifies the sink parameter number that the Trend Output parameter is linked to Example In this example a Trend 1 is set up to sample Velocity Feedback parameter number 101 The trend triggers when Velocity Feedback is greater than 1750 rpm an internal constant of 4096 When the trigger condition is true 400 more samples are taken at a rate of 12 milliseconds each before the trend stops The output data is then transferred to Analog Output 1 after the trend stops Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 BTR BTW Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 65 Trend File The All Info function allows you to read the set up information for a All Info trend file in a single message instead of reading the individual parameters within the drive PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 15 word
232. o create a cascading trend 1 Set up your first trend as normal 2 Set up your second trend with the same information as the first trend with one exception you need to set the second trend to trigger when either the Trend Select parameter for the first trend is equal to Disable or the Trend Status parameter for the first trend is equal to Triggered The order of the trends is important If you set up Trend 3 as your first trend and Trend 2 as your second trend there is a 10 millisecond delay before Trend 2 triggers and starts collecting data points However if you set up Trend 2 as your first trend and Trend 3 as your second trend Trend 3 immediately triggers and starts collecting data points This is a result of the way that the drive updates the parameters When the trend output is linked to the analog output and a chart recorder is then connected to the analog output you can view the trend output To help you find the starting point of the trend look for a negative spike followed by a positive spike These spikes are added automatically to indicate the oldest piece of sampled data If you want to take a look at the current data you can read the real time trend sample data To do this you should use the DriveTrending portion of the DriveTools software You can also use a GPT to view the output data of a trend Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 9 10 Example Trends Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1
233. o the message examples for the minimum lengths required for each message Continuous Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Whether the block transfer block is to be executed continuously or only when the run is true You should always set this to N 3 15 PLC 5 Block Transfer The following programs are examples of block transfer programming Ru ng Example for the PLC Communications Adapter Board The BTW AVAIL BTR AVAIL and BT ERROR bits from the module status word 1 020 in these examples are used in these examples The examples also show how you can use user logic to enable or disable the block transfer operations Keep in mind that it is the header message for the BTW that defines if data is to be written to or read from the drive Refer to Chapter 7 Block Transfer Services for a complete listing of message structures The following program is for a PLCS 15 or 5 25 Rung 2 0 BT BT Read Write User Available Available Logic BTR AVAIL BTW AVAIL 1 000 1 020 1 020 BTW 1e BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE EN 00 12 Rack 02 Group 0 DN BT Module 0 Error Control Block N10 0 HER 1 020 Data File N10 10 Length 64 Continuous BT Read Rung 2 1 Available BTR AVAIL 1 020 BTR BLOCK TRANSFER READ EN Rack 02 Group 0 DN Module 0 Control Block N10 80 ER Data File N10 90 Length 64 Continuous BT Rung 2 2 Error BT ERROR BTU Error Counter 1 020 CTU Count Up Counter C11 0
234. o the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can depends on the selected rack size provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 25 359 Channel B Remote I O Output 0 Parameter Number 3590 ChB RIOA Out 0 adapter mode isan Type Read Write Sink ChB RIOS Out 0 scanner mode su e Citi ae ChB RIOx Out 0 contains the first word or data Minimum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The Maximum Value _ 32767 data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also provide this value directly Other drive functions Can depends on the selected rack size provide this value through a configuration link NOTE If Channel B A is configured as RIOA w Block transfer this parameter is defined as a source parameter to pre
235. ol When configured for DH communications the PLC Communications Adapter Board can e Support 57 6K 115K or 230K baud communication rates e Support read or write messages for blocks of parameters e Allow the PLC to to issue 1336 FORCE messages using a method similar to RIO block transfer The terminating resistors R1 and R2 in the figure below depend on the baud rate If you are using this baud rate Then you need to use this terminating resistor 57 6K 150 Ohm 115K 150 Ohm 230K 82 Ohm The following is the wiring configuration necessary for DH PLC Communications Adapter Board m Channel A or B x 1 S lt Shield Bs 2 Blue Blue Hose x x lt E PLC Communications Adapter Board PLC Communications Adapter Board Channel A or B R2 Channel A or B 1 B X lt 1 Shield Shield x Shield Blue Blue Hose Blue Hose Clear Shield Blue Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter Objectives Setting the DIP Switches Chapter 2 Starting Up Chapter 2 provides the following information e setting the DIP switches to configure channels A and B e setting up the analog I O e a description of the SCANport capabilities e a descr
236. om the current trend and Trend Output contains the data samples from the previous trend The trigger condition has become true and the Tripped Trigger post samples are being taken Forced Tupper The trigger condition was forced to be true so that the post samples could be taken Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 A trend may go through the following states Force Trigger Trend Select Last post sample gathered set to 2 and one shot mode Last post sample gathered and continuous mode Enabled Last post sample gathered and continuous mode Last post sample gathered and one shot mode Programmed trigger dition is tr Trigger Tripped condition is true You can use the Trend Status parameter to determine the current state of the trend operation p Note If you are viewing a trend status parameter on a device such as the Bulletin 1201 Graphics Programming Terminal GPT it is possible to be in a constant triggered state and never see a running state This condition could occur if you are using a continuous trend and the sample condition is always true Setting Up the Trigger The trigger point specifies the condition to trap on and then gather Point the programmable post samples The following statement determines the trigger point Operand X Operator Operand Y The value of the parameter specified by Operand X is compared to the value specified by Operand Y If the condit
237. ommand is to be sent for 4096 Trend 1 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 The time is based on a 24 hour clock This field Indicates The seconds high byte and tenths of milliseconds Seconds low byte The seconds can be between 0 and 59 and the milliseconds can be between 0 and 99 Minute The number of minutes passed the hour low byte Valid values are 0 through 59 Hour The hour high byte Valid values are 0 through 23 The date of the month high byte Valid values Date are 1 through 31 The day of the week low byte where 1 is Sunday Day and 7 is Saturday The number of the year high byte 1990 is Year referenced as 0 Therefore the year 1995 would return a value of 5 Valid values are 0 through 99 Month The month of the year low byte where 1 is Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 January and 12 is December Trend Triggered Setup Parameter Values continued 7 79 Example In this example velocity feedback exceeds 1750 rpm 4096 in internal units on October 17 1995 at 2 28 33 17 pm Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW nare 20 10 4103 4096 BTR wio 90 16 4103 4096 500 Data File g 101 33 17 28 14 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 80 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter Objectives Fault and Status LEDs AP Status D1 AP Status D2 Fault Out D4 Ext Fault D5 Norm Stop D7 Motor Thermo D9 Drive En
238. ommunications Adapter Board provides two channels A and B for connecting to Allen Bradley s RIO or DH networks Each channel allows the 1336 FORCE to communicate directly with or without a PLC and is independently programmable With RIO scanner you do not necessarily need to communicate with the PLC To connect channel A or B of the PLC Communications Adapter Board to the RIO and DH communications systems you need to use twinaxial cable The connections are shown on the following pages The following table provides the information about the twinaxial cable Cable Description Type Belden 9463 Consult Allen Bradley if you use a cable other than a Belden 9463 You need to use a minimum of 3 05 meters 10 Length feet for all connections Shorter lengths may cause signal reflections You should connect all three conductors Blue Shield and Clear at each wiring point You should not make any additional ground Conscious connections to the shield Important Do not use star type connections You may only connect two cables at any wiring point on a series connected application Two 1770 XT or 150 Ohm 82 Ohm for 230K Terminations baud resistors are used for cable termination Use one at each end of the cable You can use the DIP switches that are on the PLC Communications Adapter Board to configure one or both channels for DH or RIO communications Use switches U2 and U3 to configure channel A and switches
239. ons for bidirectional operation can be shown as follows Forward Jees TB21 Reverse Relay 10V DC POWER SUPPLY 19 COM POWER SUPPLY COMMON 18 10V DC POWER SUPPLY 17 Sx D REFERENCE POT 2 5 kQ MINIMUM ADC lin ANALOGIN IN ANALOG IN Note Connect to Only One Set of Inputs IN4 and IN4 IN3 andIN3 TOTE INQ and IN2 SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK IN1 andIN1 The following table shows the analog input specifications Specifications Value Differential impedance Greater than 1 Ohm Single ended impedance 20K Ohm Maximum voltage 10V Analog Outputs The PLC Communications Adapter Board has 4 analog outputs that have a range of 10V and a digital resolution of 12 bits Chapter 2 Starting Up describes the parameters associated with scaling analog values The typical analog output connections can be shown as follows TB21 OUT ANALOG OUT gt i 4 0 to 10VDC i al 1mA Maximum COM ANALOG OUT wy gt 100 Ohm Maximum Impedance Note Connect to Only One Set of Outputs COM4 and OUT4 COM3 and OUT3 COM2 and OUT2 COM1 and OUT1 TOTE lt SIGNAL GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Determining Your Communications Configuration S CHANNEL B gt Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The PLC C
240. or by recycling the power Check parameters 425 ChA RIO FIt Sel and 426 ChA RIO Warn Sel to determine the drive response to faults These parameters determine the resolution of the condition either fault warning or none Both parameters are bit coded e Bit 0 determines the resolution to ChA Res Pgm Test If bit 0 is set in parameter 425 a soft fault is logged If bit 0 is reset in 425 and bit 0 in parameter 426 is set a warning fault is logged If bit 0 is reset in 425 and 426 no action is taken eBit 1 determines the data output status of a fault If set to 0 zeros are transmitted If set to 1 the last state is transmitted Check parameter 436 ChA FIt Sts Bit O 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in Parameter 425 ChA RIO Fit Sel Check parameter 437 ChA Warn Sts Bit O 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in parameter 426 ChA RIO Warn Sel Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 14 Fault text and code ChB Res Pgm Test 36024 Fault type Soft warning or none Description The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected the PLC controller being switched from the run mode to another mode Suggested action Check the PLC mode switch and the TO control reset Clear the fault by issuing a Clear Fault or a Drive Reset command or by recycling the power Check parameters 430 ChB RIO Fit Sel and 431 ChB RIO Warn Sel to determine the drive response
241. ord 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 2048 Message OK 30720 Message Error Word 2 Warning Queue Entry Header Number Word 3 ing Text Warn Data Character 2 Character 1 Word 4 PLC Decimal Value Header 2048 Word 2 Warning Queue Entry Data Number Word 3 Warning Text Data Character 4 Charac Word 5 Warning Text Data Character 6 Charac Word 6 Warning Text Data Character 8 Charac Word 7 Warning Text Data Character10 Charac Word 8 Warning Text Data Character 12 haracter 11 Word 9 Warning Text Data Character 14 haracter 13 Word 10 Warning Text Data Character 16 Character 15 Word 11 Data Warning Code Value Word 12 Clock Time Data Second 1 10 of Second Word 13 Clock Time Data Hour Minute Word 14 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 26 Wa n ing Queue Read Full Drive Response Block Transfer Read continued Clock Time Data Date Day Word 15 Clock Time Data Year l Month Word 16 Message Operation The Warning Queue Entry Read Full function specified in the BTW reads the contents of the warning queue specified in word 3 of the BTW message The response returns the warning text which can be shown as ASCII text The text will have every two characters in reverse order and return a time stamp indicating the day and time the warning occurred The Clock Time is returned in the order shown in the header message You should view this information as ASCII text
242. ormat BTW nioo 1 132763 387 146 388 168 367 330 368 Data File _ halted a BTR Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 39 Link Write The Parameter Link Clear message deletes all user configured Parameter Link Clear parameter links in the drive PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length Header 4 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 30464 Word 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2304 Message OK Header 30464 Message Error Word 3 Word 4 Message Operation When this request is sent to the drive all drive parameter links that you configured are deleted If an error has occurred word 2 of the BTR returns 30464 Example In this example a Parameter Link Clear request was sent through the BTW The BTR was only required to check for an error Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 BTW Data File BTR Data File Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 40 User Text String This read only message retrieves from the drive the user custom User Text String Read product name location test string which identifies the product The text string is 16 characters long PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 11 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer W
243. ort Fault Status cece cee Using the SCANport Image a Setting Up the Analog I O Parameters onnaa Understanding Function BIOCKS naana aaa Using System Resources naana Parameters Chapter 6 Chapter Objectives 2 cc cece eee eee ees BRAM Functions c2 sc25seeke betes kogaeeys ped ee we ae are Parameter Listing cc cece eee cece eee eee eens Parameter Files and Groups 200 ee eeeneeeeeees File L Stanu s2s2crccertivategeiwenddwrwonadendd File 2 Communications 0 aa File3 Velocity TOQUE fenia aaa File 4 Diagnostics uuna Parameter Conventions n aaua Block Transfer Services Chapter 7 Chapter Objectives oaa BIOGK TrONSIEN te miraa aea a E A E a A A Block Transfer Status Word cece cee eects Parameter Read oo cece aeaa Parameter Value Read ccc cece eens Continuous Parameter Value Read Scattered Parameter Value Read ParameterRead Full cc cece cece tees Parameter WTE wisad vced dacne ehadid dn Mota dae Ra eae ar Parameter Value Write ccc cee ee tees Continuous Parameter Value Write Scattered Parameter Value Write Fault QUEUE 2 it cawen ut certeses eX ede DEENA Fault Clear Reset oe 0341085 sere ad rerede durcoes eon Trip Fault Queue Number 0 02 e ee eeee Fault Entry Redd Full ase 5 a u a tad alert sirami weira a Slane Warning Queue 0 ccc eee eee Warning Clean sesse pate bas eae eG amdroks kurdik daia Warning Queue Read Full
244. ort device 5 6 ChA Logic Cmd In 7 ChB Logic Cmd In NOTE Bit 0 is not used Also the SCANport device number is determined by the SCANport connection it is plugged into Masking Control Functions You can also mask control functions This allows you to enable or disable a control function for all or some of the devices Important You cannot mask the stop command Any device attached to the PLC Communications Adapter Board can stop the drive at any time To set a mask for a control function you can use the following parameters To set a mask to control this function eo parameter Control which ports can accept the control functions 408 Issue forward reverse commands 409 Issue a start command 410 Issue a jog command 411 Select an alternate reference or preset speed 412 Generate a clear fault command 413 Reset faults 414 Allow exclusive control of logic commands 415 For each of these parameters each bit represents a device This bit 1 Represents SCANport device 1 SCANport device 2 SCANport device 3 SCANport device 4 SCANport device 5 ChA Logic Cmd In NIAI AJOIN ChB Logic Cmd In Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 8 gt NOTE Bit 0 is not used Also the SCANport device number is determined by the SCANport connection it is plugged into If a bit is set to 0 for a mask parameter the control function is disabled If a bit is set to 1
245. ory Default 0 specified trend sample rate You should link Trend Minimum Value 327670 In 1 to a source parameter such as velocity torque Maximum Value 32767 or current for the trend to make sense File Group Diagnostics Trend I O These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rpm then Trend In 1 s drive units will be displayed in rom The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 455 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X Parameter Number 455 Trl Opnd Parm X Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Tr1 Opnd Parm X specifies the first of two parameter Factory Default 0 numbers for the trend trigger evaluation The data Minimum Value 327670 value for the entered link parameter number is used Maximum Value 32767 in the trigger evaluation File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rpm then Trl Opnd Parm X s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 47 456 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y Trl Opnd Parm Y Tr1 Opnd Parm Y specifies the second of two parameter numbers used for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered link param
246. ough 15 decimal and I O bit numbering is 0 through 17 octal However bit numbering in the drive parameters including ChA Logic Cmd In and ChB Logic Cmd In is 0 through 15 decimal You should keep this in mind when working with the Logic Command For example if you want to set the Ramp Disable bit in the Logic Command bit 9 decimal you would need to set bit 11 octal in your PLC program If you select the external speed reference the PLC controller must send a 16 bit word to parameter 101 Velocity Reference 1 HI in the drive Because the speed reference is a complete 16 bit word the PLC controller must send the data as a complete word rather than as individual bits as was the case for logic command bits Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 4 The following figure shows the correlation between the output image table bits and the bits used by the Logic Command SCANport 5 ChA Logic Cmd In Output Image Parameter such as 323 7 gt in octal Channel A Parameter 367 aa Evaluation Bi Ramp Stop Bi Ramp Stop Bi Start Bi Start Bi Jogl Bi Jog1l Bi Clear Fault Bi Clear Fault Bi Forward Bi Forward Logic Command Parameter 52 Bi Reverse Bi Reverse Bi Jog2 Bi Jog2 Bi Current Limit Stop Bi Current Limit Stop Coast Stop Bi Coast Stop Ramp Disable Bi Ramp Disable it10 Flux Enable Bi Flux Enable itll Process Trim Enable Bi Process Trim Enable it12 Velocity Ref Select A Bi Velocity R
247. oup Communications 1 0 SCAN port I O 320 Data Input D1 Parameter Number 320 Data In D1 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In D1 contains the seventh image word from Factory Default 0 the SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port 1 0 321 Data Input D2 Parameter Number 321 Data In D2 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Data In D2 contains the eighth image word from the Factory Default 0 SCANport output image table Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 SCAN port I O Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 15 322 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 0 ChA RIOA In 0 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 0 scanner mode ChA RIOx In 0 contains the first word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3220 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack si
248. permission of the Allen Bradley Company is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use this Manual 2cccsssavbseewsaeeeweseagen What Is the PLC Communications Adapter Board Purpose ofthis Manual 2 xc w cov eaewacs dave w eee eee anes 25 Contents of this Manual ccc cece eee ee ees Related Documentation cece eee ees Terms and Abbreviations 00 0c cece cece a Common Techniques Used in this Manual 0 ecu eee Allen Bradley Support 0 0 cee cece eee Local Product Support icsicckeedd condita sew ademas Technical ProductAssistance 0 eee eee ee Catalog Number Descripti Nsa emisiei naaa Installing and Wiring Your Chapter 1 PLC Communications Chapter Objectives Adapter Board Mounting the PLC Communications Adapter Board Setting Your Input Voltage cece cece ete eee Wrinng t BRAM si caidich aircon ainndi ss Gob rec a yeh wae aed Terminal Block Locations 0s nsiatidedexdeedevedieov anys Discrete lO vetuoettutv
249. plied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate that a Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at POER ChB GO Rack Flt warning module group 0 but no rack is paees a the a 13 ee 36031 ornone being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate that a Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at er ChB G2 Rack Flt warning module group 2 but no rack is oe i le as 1s ee 36032 ornone being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate that a Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at a catsaot ChB G4 Rack Flt warning module group 4 but no rack is cones j me pa E i 36033 or none being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel The DIP switches indicate thata Check cables for connections Soft rack should be scanned at PN ChB G6 Rack Flt warning module group 6 but no rack is Chipck Hi the m 13 on 36034 or none being scanned at that module Check if power is applied to the RIO group adapter channel Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 8 16 This Page Intentionally Blank Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Chapter 9 Using the Trend Features Chapter Objectives Chapter 9 provides information that can help you use trends This ch
250. pplied refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 2 U2 or U4 Switches 1 and 2 AS Setting Your Protocol OF ON N We SS A specify your protocol Use the following chart to set switches 1 and 2 on either U2 or U4 to If you are using Ahen i owe And SW2 to RIO without block transfer Off Off RIO without RIO with block transfer Off On Block Transfer Off Off Kogi l On DH On Off ocK Iranster of RIO scanner mode On On RIO Scanner On On U2 or U4 Setting Your Baud Rate lt gt Switches 3 and 4 specify the baud rate that you want to use Use the following chart to set switches 3 and 4 on either U2 or U4 to If nt t Then Gama de i a a BEES WO 57 6K Off Off 115 2K Off On 230 4K On Off On Once you have set the protocol and baud rate DIP switches you should go to the section appropriate to your protocol If you selected this protocol Go to this page RIO with or without block transfer Page 2 3 DH Page 2 8 RIO scanner mode Page 2 6 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Configuring the RIO Adapter Protocol U2 or U4 Switches 5 and6 OFF w NA RIO Rack Size SW5 Sne 1 4 off off 1 2 off On 3 4 On off Full On On U2 or U4 ES OFF QV ON A 2 3 If you are using the the RIO adapter protocol you need to follow these steps once you have set the protocol and baud rate specify the rack si
251. pret and correct problems with 8 Troubleshooting P p 4 your PLC Communications Adapter Board 9 Using the Trending Provides step by step instructions for using trending Features for diagnostic purposes Specifications and Provides specifications and supplemental information 10 Supplemental including a parameter cross reference by number and Information name and a chart of the DIP switch settings Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 For A description of function blocks and function block programming P 3 discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if you do not follow ESD control precautions If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with SCANport devices and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up or subsequent troubleshooting of this board Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and or equipment damage A ATTENTION This board contains ESD electrostatic Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning related Allen Bradley products To obtain a copy contact your local Allen Bradley office or distrib
252. r Bits 0 11 Word 3 Data Sample 2 Data Sample 31 Data Sample 32 Message Operation The Run File Data function reads the run time buffer within the drive for the specified trend file This buffer is continually being refreshed with new data when the trend is in the running state Until the trend is triggered the data is placed in the stored data file You can use the Run File Data function to monitor data on line You can read 32 data samples from the data sample pointed to by the offset To use the Run File Data function you need to specify the trend number in bits 12 through 15 and the offset into the buffer in bits 0 through 11 of the word 3 of the BTW Therefore you need to add the offset value to the trend number Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Run File Data continued 7 71 The following are the valid trend numbers Roon Specifies that the command is to be sent for 4096 Trend 1 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 The offset specifies where in the buffer you want to start reading the 32 data points For example if you specify an offset of 64 the Run File Data function returns the 32 data samples starting from data sample 64 If you specify an offset of zero then the BTR message has the following format Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header 35 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 4100 Message OK Word 2 Header Word 3 28668 Message Erro
253. r Trend Number Data Word 4 Data Word 5 Data Word 6 In Timestamp s Ticks Data Word 7 Data Word 8 Data Word 9 Data Word 10 Data Word 34 Data Word 35 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Timestamp Seconds Timestamp inutes Hours a a 7 72 Run File Data continued Data Format BTW Data File uM ple 20 90 js ae 4128 4093 4092 4093 4092 4091 4094 4093 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Index indicates the index into the 500 word buffer where the last data point was written Timestamp is updated when the last 500 data point is written The time stamp has the following format This field Indicates Ticks The number of ticks One tick equals two milliseconds Valid values are 0 through 499 The number of seconds Valid values are 0 through Seconds 59 f The number of minutes passed the hour Valid Minute values are 0 through 59 Hour The hour Valid values are 0 through 23 If you request less than 32 trend samples then run time data is padded with zeros If you request data samples past the end of the buffer then run time data is padded with zeros Important The data samples that you are reading are not being read from the trend file Instead the data samples are read from the running trend buffer This buffer is continually changing at the rate specified by the sampling rate for that particular trend
254. r of links to be read and the starting sink parameter number The response returns the parameter number of the source that is linked to each sink parameter The response returns links for a consecutive list of sink parameters up to 60 links If a parameter is not linked a value of 0 is returned Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Continuous Parameter Link Read continued 7 31 Example A Continuous Parameter Link Read is requested for nine parameter links word N10 2 beginning with parameter 359 The block transfer response returns the source parameters that are linked to parameters 359 through 367 In this example Data Format BTW Data File BTR 10 90 359 56 360 59 361 81 362 Data File Parameter 359 is linked to parameter 56 Parameter 360 is linked to parameter 143 Parameter 367 is linked to parameter 380 Parameters 361 through 366 are not linked 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 oam on s aee soe 2o gt e is 2e as r Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 32 Link Read The Scattered Parameter Link Read message returns a list of up to 30 Scattered Parameter Link Read links in the source to sink order found in the drive The links do not have to be in consecutive order PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 5 63 words BTR instruction length 5 63 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 5 63 PLC Decimal V
255. r of sink to source in words 3 and 4 Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW f BTR f Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 35 Link Write The Continuous Parameter Link Write message writes a list of up to Continuous Parameter Link Write 60 consecutive links to the drive starting at the defined sink parameter PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 5 64 words BTR instruction length 5 64 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length Header 5 64 Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 32764 Word 2 Number of Parameter Header Links to Write Word 3 Data Parameter Number 1 i Data Link Number 1 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 4 M OK 32764 Message Error Word 2 Number of Parameter Header Links to Write Word 3 Starting Parameter Data Number Word 4 Data Status Number 1 i Data Link Number 2 Word 6 Data Link Number 60 Word 64 Message Operation Data Status Number 2 Word 6 Data Status Number 60 Word 64 The Continuous Parameter Link Write function specified in the BTW writes a set of consecutive links to the drive Word 3 of the BTW defines the number of links to be written Word 4 defines the starting sink parameter The consecutive link source parameters are then listed in the remaining header words You can make up to 60 continuous links with this block transfer function Publication 1336 FORCE
256. r4 Opnd Parm X Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Tr4 Opnd Parm X specifies the first of two parameter Factory Default 0 numbers for the trend trigger evaluation The data Minimum Value 327670 value for the entered link parameter number is used Maximum Value 32767 in the trigger evaluation File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rom then Tr4 Opnd Parm X s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 486 Trend 4 Operand Parameter Y Parameter Number 486 Tr4 Opnd Parm Y Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Tr4 Opnd Parm Y specifies the second of two Factory Default 0 parameter numbers used for the trend trigger Minimum Value 327670 evaluation The data value for the entered link Maximum Value 32767 parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rom then Tr4 Opnd Parm Y s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 487 Trend 4 Operator Parameter Number 487 Tr4 Operator Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable
257. rack File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also provide this value directly Other drive functions can depends on the selected rack size provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 362 Channel B Remote I O Output 3 Parameter Number 3620 ChB RIOA Out 3 adapter mode Parameter Type Read Write Sink ChB RIOS Out 3 scanner mode Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None ChB RIOx Out 3 contains the fourth word or data Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can provide this value directly Other drive functions can provide this value through a configuration link File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998
258. rameter Values to Write Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value 1 Parameter Number 2 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 3 Message OK 32765 Message Error Number of Parameter Values to Write Parameter Number 1 Status Word 1 Parameter Number 2 Parameter Value 2 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Value 3 Parameter Number 30 Parameter Value 30 Status Word 2 Parameter Number 3 Status Word 3 Data Word 62 Data Word 63 Parameter Data Bieta Number 30 Word 62 Parameter Value or Data Status Word 30 Word 63 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 17 Scattered Parameter Value Write Message Operation continued The Scattered Parameter Value Write function specified in the BTW writes data values to a defined group of parameters in any order Word 3 of the BTW data file defines the number of parameters to be written to The parameters to be written to and their order is defined starting with word 4 The BTR response message returns a status word for each value written to indicating whether the parameter write was successful If a transfer is not successful for a given parameter the value in the parameter number location is negative bit 15 is set to 1 If an error occurs the response returns a status code for the error Example In this example six parameters were written to in a 1336 FORCE Word 3 of the BTW message N10 12 defines the n
259. rand The second half of the trend trigger evaluation 456 466 476 486 Parameter Y This parameter can either be a constant value i Operand Y or linked to another parameter The operator used for the trend trigger 457 467 Trend Operator evaluation which compares Operand X to 477 487 Operand Y 458 468 Trend Sample Rate The interval at which the data in the Trend 478 488 P Input parameter is sampled aa e ae 479 489 Samples put p cai ee evaluation becomes true 460 470 Trend Continuous Whether a single trend operation one shot or 480 490 Trigger a continuous trend operation is performed The trend mode to use The trend mode may 461 471 481 491 Trend Select be enable a trend disable a trend or force a i trigger condition Which state the trend is currently in The trend 462 472 482 492 Trend Status states are Stopped Forced Trigger Running and Tripped Trigger The last 500 data values once the trigger 463 473 eee 483 493 Trend Output condition is true and all post samples are Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 gathered The parameters for the four trend buffers behave in the same way Therefore the parameter names listed in this chapter are listed generically For example Trl Opnd Parm X is listed as Trend Operand Parameter X or Operand X For more information about the trending parameters refer to Chapter 6 Parameters Understanding How Trending Works By
260. rand X For example if Operand X is linked to Velocity Feedback then the value of Operand Y is displayed in rpms AND NAND OR and NOR The AND NAND OR and NOR logic operators are special in that they are not defined as you might expect In addition if you are using these logic operators you will generally set either Operand X or Operand Y to a constant value Important If you set either Operand X or Operand Y to 0 the trigger condition will never be true because the PLC Communications Adapter Board will not know which bits you want to monitor The following examples are provided to help you better understand how the PLC Communications Adapter Board interprets these logic operators The following examples use an x when the PLC Communications Adapter Board does not care whether that particular bit is set The examples also assume that Operand X is linked to a 16 bit parameter If you use the AND operator and set Operand Y to a mask value of 0000 0100 0001 0011 the trigger condition is only true when Operand X has a value of xxxx x1xx xxx xx11 If you use the NAND operator and set Operand Y to a mask value of 0000 0100 0001 0011 the trigger condition is only true when Operand X has a value of xxxx xOxx xxx0 xx00 If you use the OR operator and set Operand Y to a mask value of 0000 0001 0100 0000 the trigger condition is only true when Operand X has a value of XXXX XXX xOxx Xxxx XXXX XXX x1xx Xxxx XXXX XXXO X1XX Xxxx
261. re malfunction LED blinking AP soft fault D2 Green LED on Normal AP operation LED off D3 on or hardware malfunction LED blinking AP warning Domino Processor DP Status D3 and D6 These LEDs reflect the operational status of the Domino processor LED State Function D3 Red LED on DP hard fault LED off D6 on or hardware malfunction LED blinking DP soft fault D6 Green LEDon Normal DP operation LED off D3 on or hardware malfunction LED blinking DP warning PLC Communications Adapter Status D4 D5 D7 D9 and D11 These LEDs reflect the operational status of the drive permissives LED State Function D4 Red LED on System fault present LED off System fault not present D5 Red LED on External fault present LED off External fault not present D7 Red LED on Normal drive stop signal present LED off Normal drive stop signal not present D9 Red LED on_ Motor thermoguard open LED off Motor thermoguard closed D11 Green LEDon_ Drive enable signal present LED off Drive disabled Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Channel A Status D8 D10 and D12 Channel B Status D13 D14 and D15 These LEDs reflect the operational status of either RIO or DH communications LED State RIO Adapter Function RIO Scanner Function DH Function pea LED on Hardware malfunction Hardware malfunction eos plug Red
262. rend 3 Continuous Trigger 6 52 Trend 3 Operand Parameter X Trend 3 Operand Parameter Y Trend 3 Operator 6 52 Trend 3 Post Samples 6 52 Trend 3 Sample Rate 6 52 Trend 3 Select _6 53 Trend 3 Status Trend 4 Continuous Trigger 6 55 Trend 4 Operand Parameter X Trend 4 Operand Parameter Y Trend 4 Operator 6 54 Trend 4 Post Samples Trend 4 Sample Rate Trend 4 Select 6 55 Trend 4 Status Trend Input 1 6 44 Trend Input 2 6 49 Trend Input 3 6 51 Trend Input 4 6 53 Trend Output 1 6 48 Trend Output 2 6 51 Trend Output 3 Trend Output 4 possible states 9 3 post samples 9 7 setting trigger point 9 4 9 6 trend parameter listing 9 2 viewing results 9 4 Trigger Time Trip Fault Queue Number 7 29 troubleshooting 8 1 contacting Allen Bradley P 7 U User Text String Read 7 4 User Text String Write 7 44 Ww Warning Clear 7 23 Warning Queue Read Full 7 25 warnings channel A status 6 44 channel B status 6 45 identifying at ports 6 46 JN Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation helps its customers receive a superior return on their investment by bringing together leading brands in industrial automation creating a broad spectrum of easy to integrate Allen Bradley products These are supported by local technical resources available worldwide a global network of system solutions providers and the advanced technology resources of Rockwell
263. rete data If you are using this rack size Then ESE group TR are available Full 1 7 3 4 1 5 or 3 7 1 2 1 3 3 5 or 5 7 1 4 1 3 5 or 7 Each group number reserves a single 16 bit word in both the input and output image table of the PLC controller for the assigned rack number In the drive these words are directly linked to internal drive parameters using source and sink parameters Important If you select RIO with block transfer the first RIO data word is reserved for block transfer Linking to this data word causes the block transfer feature to be non operative In the following descriptions each module group appears to have a 16 bit input and output module installed The following figure shows the RIO full rack configuration Module group 0 is reserved for block transfer if you select RIO with the block transfer protocol Module Group The following figure shows the RIO 3 4 rack configuration If the 3 4 rack configuration starts at group 0 and you select RIO with the block transfer protocol module group 0 is reserved for block transfer If the 3 4 rack configuration starts at group 2 and you select RIO with the block transfer protocol then module group 2 is reserved for block transfer Starting Group 2 Module Group 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Starting Group 0 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 4 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 1
264. return a value of 5 Month The month of the year where 1 is January and 12 is December If an error has occurred word 2 of the response returns a negative value Example In this example Fault Queue Entry 3 was retrieved from the drive The BTR response returned the ASCII text Drive Reset Flt with each two characters reversed The Fault Code for this example is 22 Data Format 8 9 BTW BTR N10 90 1792 3 29252 30313 293 95038 a 8308 2771 Data File ASCII Display Values These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 23 Warning Queue The Warning Clear message issues either a Clear Fault Warning Warning Clear command or a Clear Warning Queue command to the drive PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 Message Length Header Word 1 Header Word 2 PLC Decimal Value 30720 PLC Decimal Value 2048 Message OK 30720 Message Error Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Data Word 3 Header Warning Command Word 4 Data Word 4 Warning Command RET Message Request Value EE Command Message Request w m Re Wami Value JEE Command ear Fault Waming 02 Clear Warning Queue 0 e oa This bitindicates the status of the request i This bit indi
265. rite Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 261 Message OK 32507 Message Error Word 2 261 Header Word 3 Product Text Data Character 2 Charac Word 4 Product Text Data Character 4 Charac Word 5 Product Text Data Character 6 Charac Word 6 Product Text Data Character 8 Charac Word 7 Product Text Data Character 10 Charac Word 8 Product Text Data Character12 Character 11 Word 9 Product Text Data Character14 Character 13 Word 10 Product Text Data Character16 Character 15 Word 11 Message Operation This operation reads your custom product test string stored in the drive The response message returns this information beginning with data word 4 The text string is returned with each data word containing two ASCII characters per word This data returns with the first and second characters in opposite order as shown in the example Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 User Text String Read continued 7 41 If an error has occurred in the BTW word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 32507 Example In this example the BTW defined a User Text String Read request in word 2 of the BTW with a value of 261 The BTR responds by returning a value of 261 in word 2 indicating a successful read In addition it returned the user text string in data words 4 through 11 stored in the drive The chara
266. rollers ePLC 5 10 PLC 5 15 PLC 5 25 Family e PLC 5 40 and 5 60 as scanner and as adapter ePLC 5 40L Family 1771 ASB Flex 1 0 These adapters were tested with the current revision level of the listed PLC processors Earlier versions of these processors may not be compatible RIO scanner has only been tested with these devices Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 10 2 This category Analog I O Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Has these specifications Differential impedance for input greater than 1 Ohm Single ended impedance for input 20K Ohm Maximum voltage for input 10V Output impedance 100 Ohm Output voltage 10V Maximum current for output ImA Software Block Diagram SCANport SCANports o Aa O N SCANport Image In Oo Aa O N Logic Command Oo Aa O N ChA Logic Cmd In 367 ChB Logic Cmd In 368 SP Analog In Par 388 10 3 The following figures show the parameter linking and interactions within the PLC Communications Adapter Board For more information about parameter linking refer to Chapter 5 Understanding the Resources of Your Drive SP Analog In Select Par 391 SP Fault Select P ar 440 SP Warning Select Par 441 Data In A1 Par 314 Data In A2 Par 315 Data In B1 Par 316 Data In B2 Par 317 Data In C1 Par 318 Data In C2 Par 319 Data In D1 Par 320 Data In D2 Par 321 Data Out A
267. ruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header 3 Word 1 Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value Header PLC Decimal Value 4096 Message OK 28672 Message Error 4096 Word 2 Header Word 3 Trends Available Message Operation You can use the Number of Trends Available function to request the number of trends that the drive supports This function always returns 4 Example In this example a message was sent to the drive to request the number of trend files available The drive response indicates that four trend files are available Data Format 0 1 3 4 8 9 BTW BTR Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Trend File Maximum Trend Size Available 7 57 The Maximum Trend Size Available function allows you to determine the size of the trend buffer This function always returns 500 PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 3 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length Header 3 Word 1 Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value Header PLC Decimal Value 4097 Message OK 28671 Message Error 4097 Word 2 Header Word 3 Maximum Trend Size Message Operation You can use the Maximum Trend Size Available function to determine the size of the trend b
268. s Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value 4098 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length 15 PLC Decimal Value 4098 Message OK 28670 Message Error Trend Number Trend Status Trend Sample Size Trend Number Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 66 All Info continued Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Message Operation You can use the All Info function to read the set up information for a trend file in one message as opposed to the individual parameters within the drive The following are the valid trend numbers Roane Specifies that the command is to be sent for 4096 Trend 1 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 The following are the possible status values ies Indicates that the trend is 1 Stopped 2 Running 3 In the tripped trigger state The condition has become true and the post samples are being taken In the forced trigger state The trigger condition 4 was forced to be true so that the post samples could be taken Trend Sample Size is always 500 Post Samples specifies the number of samples that are taken once the trigger condition has been tripped or is forced One sample is used for the instance when the trigger becomes true Operator data specifies how to compare the two data values for the trigger condition Sample Time Rate specifies t
269. s m30 M0001245 AP Status DI PLC COMM ADAPT ENGLISH AP Status D2 _ gt gt wines ORALLY Fault Out 04 355 Ra DP Status D3 Ext Fault D5 ype ts Pia 7 M E DP Status D6 Norm Stop D rg in a i i Channel A Status D8 Motor Thermo 0 ah ELEAN S lt agf Channel A Status D10 Drive Enable D11 2 f B Channel A Status D12 Channel A Connector Tog N Channel B Connector Voltage Selection Inputs COOCOO PERRE o DOD Terminal Block TB20 Terminal Block TB21 Discrete I O Connections Analog I O Connections Keyed Mounting Slot Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Mounting the PLC Communications Adapter Board Motor Control Board a i Keyed Mounting Slot PLC Communications Adapter Board a Phillips Head S crew Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 To mount your PLC Communications Adapter Board on to your 1336 FORCE you need to ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard assure that all power to the drive has been removed before proceeding 1 Place the PLC Communications Adapter Board over the keyed mounting slots 2 Slide the board up into the main control board connector J1 3 Secure the board to the 1336 FORCE mounting plate using the two Phillips head screws that are provided with the kit The following illustration shows the main control board of the 1336 FORCE with the PLC Communication
270. s defined starting with word 4 An unused word is left between each parameter request so the BTR can respond with the parameter value as shown If an error has occurred in reading any of the parameters e Word 2 of the BTR returns a value of 32765 e Bit 15 of the BTR word for the number of that parameter is set e The BTR word for the value of that parameter returns a status word instead of the parameter value Example In this example eight parameters were read from a 1336 FORCE as defined in word 3 of the BTW data file The requested parameter numbers were 5 7 8 20 18 17 19 and 36 The BTR response returned the values of these parameters into the BTR data file These values are in drive units Data Format 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTW N10 20 18 19 36 BTR 19 36 N10 100 4096 18 4096 These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 10 Parameter Read The Parameter Read Full function provides the requesting remote Parameter Read Full T O source with all known attributes for the parameters requested This information includes the parameter s current value descriptor multiply and divide value base value offset value text string file group and element reference minimum value maximum value default value and unit text string PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction leng
271. s 6 36 475 Tr3 Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 51 412 Ref Mask 4 Masks 6 36 476 Tr3 Opnd Parm Y 9 Trend Setup 6 51 413 Clr Fault Mask 4 Masks 6 36 477 Tr3 Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 52 414 Reset Drive Mask 4 Masks 6 36 478 Tr3 Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 52 415 Local Mask 4 Masks 6 36 479 Tr3 Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 52 416 SP Default Ref 3 Velocity Ref 6 37 480 Tr3 Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 52 425 ChA RIO FitSel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 38 481 Tr3 Select 9 Trend Setup 6 53 426 ChA RIO Warn Sel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 39 482 Tr3 Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 53 427 Redund Chan No 7 Channel A 6 40 483 Trend Out 3 9 Trend 1 0 6 53 430 ChB RIO FitSel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 41 484 Trendin 4 9 Trend 1 0 6 53 431 ChB RIO Warn Sel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 42 485 Tr4 Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 54 432 ChB RIOS Retries 8 Channel B 6 43 486 Tr4 Opnd Parm Y 9 Trend Setup 6 54 435 DIP Fault Setup 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 43 487 Tr4 Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 54 436 ChA Fault Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 43 488 Tr4 Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 54 437 ChA Warn Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 44 489 Tr4 Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 55 438 ChB Fault Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 44 490 Tr4 Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 55 439 ChB Warn Sts 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 45 491 Tr4 Select 9 Trend Setup 6 55 440 SP FaultSel 2
272. s Adapter Board mounted on it 1336 FORCE Mounting Plate i Phillips Head Screw Keyed Mounting Slot Setting Your Input Voltage Writing to BRAM A sve Terminal Block Locations To select your input voltage you need to set the discrete I O jumpers ATTENTION To avoid damaging the PLC Communications Adapter Board you must set all discrete I O jumpers to the same input voltage applied to the PLC Communications Adapter Board The voltage must be either 24V dc or 120V ac a sa discrete To set this input To either T O jumper DR EN Drive Enable 24V dc or 120V ac M THERM Motor Thermoguard 24V dc or 120V ac N STOP Normal Stop 24V dc or 120V ac X FLT External Fault 24V dc or 120V ac You can use jumper J3 on the PLC Communications Adapter Board to either allow enable or not allow disable writes to Battery backed Random Access Memory BRAM Choose To EN Enabled Allow writes to BRAM DIS Disabled Not allow writes to BRAM Two terminal blocks TB20 and TB21 are provided at the bottom of the PLC Communications Adapter Board for discrete and analog I O wiring To make the connections more easily you can pull apart the terminal blocks when connecting the cables Both terminal blocks accept a maximum wire size of 3 3 mm 12 AWG and a minimum wire size of 0 60 mm 30 AWG Maximum torque is 0 79 N m 7 Ib in Recommended control signal wire is Berden Descript
273. s for all entries in the scan list This is only active when RIO scanner mode is selected on the DIP switches Parameter Number 427 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 File Group Communication 1 0 Channel A Enums 0 Channel A 1 Channel B Parameter Type Read Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 File Group Communication 1 0 Channel A Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 41 430 Channel B Remote I O Fault Select ChB RIOA Flt Sel adapter mode ChB RIOS Fit Sel scanner mode ChB RIOx Fit Sel dictates whether the PLC Communications Adapter Board will report a fault condition if a PLC controller RIO communications fault occurs at channel B If a bit is zero parameter 426 is checked to see whether a warning condition should be reported ChB RIOx Fit Sel is not used if channel B is setup for DH communications Parameter Number 430 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Bits Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value File Group 15 adapter or 255 scanner Diagnostics Fault Select S tatus Communication I O Fault Select S tatus When RIO adapter is used Enums Bits 7 4 Bit3 Bit2 Bitl Bito Res Pgm Test Fit 36024 0 No drive soft fault 1 Drive soft fault Comm Loss Flt 36022
274. s of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional Parameter Number 3270 Parameter Type Read Only Source Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 17 328 Channel A Remote 1 0 Input 6 ChA RIOA In 6 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 6 scanner mode ChA RIOXx In 6 contains the seventh word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3280 Read Only Source None None 32767 32767 Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 329
275. st Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 50 406 An Out4 Offset 6 Analog 1 0 6 34 470 Tr2 Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 50 407 An Out 4 Scale 6 Analog 1 0 6 35 471 Tr2 Select 9 Trend Setup 6 50 408 PortEnable 4 Masks 6 35 472 Tr2 Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 50 409 Dir Mask 4 Masks 6 35 473 Trend Out 2 9 Trend 1 0 6 51 410 Start Mask 4 Masks 6 35 474 Trend In 3 9 Trend I O 6 51 411 Jog Mask 4 Masks 6 36 475 Tr3 Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 51 412 Ref Mask 4 Masks 6 36 476 Tr3 Opnd Parm Y 9 Trend Setup 6 51 413 Clr Fault Mask 4 Masks 6 36 477 Tr3 Operator 9 Trend Setup 6 52 414 Reset Drive Mask 4 Masks 6 36 478 Tr3 Sample Rate 9 Trend Setup 6 52 415 Local Mask 4 Masks 6 36 479 Tr3 Post Samples 9 Trend Setup 6 52 416 SP Default Ref 3 Velocity Ref 6 37 480 Tr3 Cont Trigger 9 Trend Setup 6 52 425 ChA RIO FitSel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 38 481 Tr3 Select 9 Trend Setup 6 53 426 ChA RIO Warn Sel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 39 482 Tr3 Status 9 Trend 1 0 6 53 427 Redund Chan No 7 Channel A 6 40 483 Trend Out 3 9 Trend 1 0 6 53 430 ChB RIO FitSel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 41 484 Trendin 4 9 Trend 1 0 6 53 431 ChB RIO Warn Sel 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 42 485 Tr4 Opnd Parm X 9 Trend Setup 6 54 432 ChB RIOS Retries 8 Channel B 6 43 486 Tr4 Opnd Parm Y 9 Trend Setup 6 54 435 DIP Fault Setup 2 Adapter Diagnostics 6 43
276. t Drive You cannot change the values shown in the Logic Command by directly accessing the parameter Instead the Logic Command receives information from the logic evaluation block The logic evaluation block can receive information from up to seven sources The logic evaluation block takes this information and combines it to form a single logic command word SCANport 1 SCANport2 SCANport3 Logic Evaluation Logic Command Block Parameter 52 Channel A port 6 Channel B port 7 In this figure notice that there are five SCANports and two channels that can provide information to the logic evaluation block You can attach any combination of Human Interface Modules HIMs Graphic Programming Terminals GPTs and or SCANport communications modules to any of the five SCANports Note SCANports 1 and 2 are always available directly from the PLC Communications Adapter Board To access SCANports 3 4 and 5 you need to attach a SCANport Expansion Board to your PLC Communications Adapter Board The two available channels are accessed through parameters 367 ChA Logic Cmd In and 368 ChB Logic Cmd In Both parameters have the same bit definitions as the Logic Command Therefore even if you do not set up a channel for RIO communications you can still write to parameters 367 and 368 by using block transfer or by possibly linking to a function block Important In the PLC controller internal bit numbering is 0 thr
277. t Maximum Value 32767 Diagnostics Trend I O Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 49 464 Trend Input 2 Trend In 2 Trend In 2 specifies the data value to sample at the specified trend sample rate You should link Trend In 2 to a Source parameter such as velocity torque or current for the trend to make sense Parameter Number 464 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 327670 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Diagnostics Trend 1 0 These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rpm then Trend In 2 s drive units will be displayed in rpm The minimum and maximum values are also link dependent 465 Trend 2 Operand Parameter X Tr2 Opnd Parm X Tr2 Opnd Parm X specifies the first of two parameter numbers for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered link parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter Number 465 Parameter Type Read Write Sink Display Units Drive Units Dependent on Link Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 327670 Maximum Value 32767 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup These values depend on the source parameter that this parameter is linked to For example if the source parameter s drive units are rom then Tr2 Opnd Parm X s drive units
278. t perform the request Some messages are read only or write only 2 The requested service is not supported 3 An invalid value is in block transfer request header word 2 4 An invalid value is in block transfer request header word 3 5 An invalid value is in block transfer request header word 4 6 The data value is out of range A drive state conflict occurred The drive is in an 7 incorrect state to perform the function The drive cannot be running when certain functions are performed 7 3 The following table summarizes the valid command code that is displayed in word 2 of the block transfer write header message A complete description of the block transfer write header message is provided on the specified page PLC Class Function Decimal Page Value Parameter Read Parameter Value Read 769 7 4 Continuous Parameter Value Read 1 7 6 Scattered Parameter Value Read 3 7 8 Parameter Read Full 768 7 10 Parameter Write Parameter Value Write 31999 7 13 Continuous Parameter Value Write 32767 7 14 Scattered Parameter Value Write 32765 7 16 Fault Queue Fault Clear R eset 30976 7 18 Trip Fault Queue Number 1793 7 20 Fault Entry Read Full 1792 7 21 Warning Queue Warning Clear 30720 7 23 Warning Queue Read Full 2048 7 25 EE Memory Request Save Recall Initialize 31988 7 27 Link Read Link Parameter Read 2304 71 29 Continuous Parameter Link Read 4 7 30 Scattered Parameter Link Read
279. th 3 words BTR instruction length 23 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 768 Message OK 32000 Message Error Word 2 Data Parameter Number Word 3 Parameter Value or Data Status Word Word 4 Data Data Multiply Value Word 6 so Data Divide Value Word 7 Data Data Word 9 Message Length Header Word 1 PLC Decimal Value Header 768 Word 2 Data Word 3 Parameter Number Offset Valu e ext Data Character 2 Charac Word 10 Parameter Parameter Text Data Character 4 Charac ord 11 Parameter Text Data Character 6 Charac ord 12 Parameter Text Data Character 8 Charac Word 13 Parameter Text Data Character 10 Charac Word 14 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 11 Parameter Read Full continued Drive Response Block Transfer Read Parameter Text Data Character 12 Character 11 ord 15 Parameter Text Character 14 Character 13 ord 16 Parameter Text Data Character 16 Character 15 ord 17 File Group Element iw o or o iw o or o ord 18 oO o or o Minimum Value ord 19 Data ord 20 Data ord 21 Unit Text Data Character 2 Character 1 Word 22 Maximum Value Default Value Unit Text Data Character 4 Character 3 Word 23 Message Operation The Parameter Read Full function specified in the BTW retrieves th
280. the example Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 43 User Text String Write Example continued In this example the BTW defined a text string of Press 8 Level 2 to be written to the drive This information was entered in ASCII text with the two characters of each word entered in opposite order The BTR returned a value of 261 in word 2 indicating a successful write In addition it returned the text string in words 4 through 11 If an error had occurred in the BTW the BTR would have returned an error code in word 3 of 32507 Data Format BTW N1010 1 32507 21072 21317 8275 8248 17740 17750 8268 Data File jae 20 BTR 10 90 21072 21317 8275 8248 17740 17750 8268 Data File ASCII Display Values Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 44 Clock Data The Real Time Clock Data Read message is provided to allow the Real Time Clock Data Read drive to read the specified realtime clock The slave device can read the time in seconds minutes and hours as well as the day date month and year PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 3 words BTR instruction length 7 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 2816 Message OK 29952 Message Error Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value 2816 Clock Time Seconds 10ths of MS Clock Time Hour inute
281. this terminating resistor 57 6K 150 Ohm 115K 150 Ohm 230K 82 Ohm The following is the wiring configuration necessary for RIO adapter Blue Clear Blue Hose lt x x lt PLC Communications PLC Communications PLC Communications Adapter Board Adapter Board Adapter Board m Channel A or B Channel A or B R2 Channel A or B 1 x 1 Kal X lt 1 Shield M Shield A lt Shield 2 Sq 2 x Shield Clear Blue Shield Blue Hose Blue Hose Clear Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 1 10 PLC Communications Adapter Board Using RIO Scanner R1 Channel A or B Hadi 7 2X Shield tt Sq 2 Blue Shield Blue Hose Clear When configured for RIO scanner communications the PLC Communications Adapter Board can e Support 57 6K 115K or 230K baud communication rates at all valid module groups e Be configured as a 1 4 1 2 3 4 or full I O rack e Be configured to ignore PLC fault conditions and continue operating e Allow the 1336 FORCE to scan a logical rack of data from multiple devices such as Flex I O 1771 ASB or a 1336 FORCE as an adapter The terminating resistors R1 and R2 in the figure below depend on the baud rate Then you need to use this If you ar
282. tion 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 The redundant mode operates as follows 1 The respective PLC controller transfers data from the output image table of each PLC controller to the PLC Communications Adapter Board 2 The RIO redundant channel number parameter parameter 427 determines which PLC controller s output is made available to the drive via parameters 322 through 329 3 Each PLC controller input image table receives data from the drive via parameters 351 through 358 4 Block transfer messages from both drives are processed as normal if both channels are configured for block transfer The RIO scanner mode allows you to control a logical rack of I O data from a single drive The I O data that makes up the logical rack may be located on multiple devices but the drive using RIO scanner mode sees the logical rack of I O data as a single unit The drive keeps track of the devices by using a scan list which is a list of the devices to scan The RIO scanner scans only one logical rack of data which is eight words of I O data The logical rack that is scanned can either be a full rack or any combination of partial racks such as 1 4 rack 1 2 rack or 3 4 rack as long as the total does not exceed one logical rack For example you could have the RIO scanner scan a 1 4 rack and a 3 4 rack but you could not have the RIO scanner scan a 1 2 rack with a 3 4 rack You could also have the RIO scanner scan less than a full rack s
283. to a digital value of 2048 providing a total range of 4096 When calibrating analog inputs a scale factor is applied to this value to provide an effective range of 32767 16 x 2048 The offset parameter determines the offset in volts applied to the raw analog value before the scale factor is applied This allows you to shift the range of the analog input by 4096 drive units 20 volts 2 11 Understanding the Scale and Offset Parameters for Input Analog Input 1 and Analog Input 2 are used in explaining the scale and offset parameters At Analog Input 1 between TB21 terminals 9 and 10 a potentiometer with a range of 10V dc has been connected Analog Input 1 has been linked to Velocity Reference parameter 101 in the drive which gives the potentiometer control of the external velocity reference To calibrate the pot to control 100 base speed in both directions you need to adjust the scale parameter The default value of the scale parameters allows a total range of 4096 2048 to 2048 This allows only 50 base speed in each direction By setting a scale factor of 2 in Analog Input 1 Scale the digital input is multiplied by 2 This provides a range of 4096 or 100 base speed in both directions If you want a range of 2 times base speed the scale factor would be 4 base speed is 4096 2 times base speed is 8192 2048 times 4 is 8192 Analog Input 1 Offset remains at the default value of zero allowing the input range to b
284. to faults These parameters determine the resolution of the condition either fault warning or none Both parameters are bit coded e Bit 0 determines the resolution to ChB Res Pgm Test If bit 0 is set in parameter 430 a soft fault is logged If bit O is reset in 430 and bit 0 in parameter 431 is set a warning fault is logged If bit 0 is reset in 430 and 431 no action is taken eBit 1 determines the data output status of a fault If set to 0 zeros are transmitted If set to 1 the last state is transmitted Check parameter 438 ChB Fit Sts Bit O 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in Parameter 430 ChB RIO Fit Sel Check parameter 439 ChB Warn Sts Bit O 1 indicates a fault if configured to do so in parameter 431 ChB RIO Warn Sel ChA Rack Fault 36025 Soft warning or none The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected that the PLC controller either has its rack number rack address inhibited or is no longer scanning the rack Check if the PLC has its rack inhibited Check if the PLC is scanning the rack Check the rack address on the PLC Communications Adapter Board Refer to the table in Chapter 2 to verify the DIP switch settings ChB Rack Fault 36026 Soft warning or none The PLC Communications Adapter Board has detected that the PLC controller either has its rack number rack address inhibited or is no longer scanning the rack Publication 1336 FOR
285. tops With a continuous trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend continues looking for the next occurrence of a true trigger condition Parameter Number 480 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 6 53 481 Trend 3 Select Tr3 Select Tr3 Select specifies the trend mode The states are as follows 0 Disable the trend Parameter Number 481 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 L Enable the tred File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 2 Force a true trigger condition Enums 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Force Trig 482 Trend 3 Status Parameter Number 482 Tr3 Status Parameter Type Read Only Non Linkable Source Display Units Drive Units None Tr3 Status identifies which state the trend is Factory Default 1 currently in The following states are possible Minimum Value 1 1 Stopped Trending is not executing oa ave f Hels eae File Group Diagnostics Trend 1 0 2 Running Trending is executing but the trigger point has not yet been reached Enums 1 Stopped 2 R unning 3 Tripped Trigger Trending is executing and the trigger 3 Trip Trig 4 Force Trip pointhas been reac
286. transferring data using block transfer e using RIO redundant mode e using RIO scanner mode When you configure the PLC Communications Adapter Board for RIO communications the drive looks like a remote I O chassis to a PLC This allows you to use either discrete message transfer or block transfer to communicate with the PLC With discrete message transfer the PLC controller s I O image table is used to transfer the data that the drive needs to have continuously updated With block transfer data is sent between the drive and PLC controller when requested Block transfer is the transfer of data in blocks of data up to 64 words For additional information about using block transfer routines refer to your PLC user manual You can configure channel A channel B or both channels for Allen Bradley RIO communications The communications method that you choose either RIO or DH determines which parameters for the PLC Communications Adapter Board are defined Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 2 The following table identifies which parameters are defined when you select RIO communications r oe Ari Channel n Then these parameters are And these parameters are not defined for defined for defined defined RIO RIO aan sais y N 322 329 351 358 425 426 330 337 359 366 427 gt j 427 430 431 No Yes a Oaa roa 322 329 351 358 425 427 322 337 351 366 425 426 Yes Yes 427 None No No None 322 3
287. u have created your function block application you need to download it to the drive where it is compiled into a function block program When you download and compile the application the PLC Communications Adapter Board creates the functionality and data sets within the drive Once the application is running each event is executed with a 20 millisecond task interval Note You can only have one function block application executing in the drive at any given time Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 5 14 Using System Resources The following figure shows an example of a 1336 FORCE drive with a PLC Communications Adapter Board Channel A is set up for scanner mode and is controlling other drives and adapters A function block control application is also used Rec1 Indirect 17 Xmit Data 1 Rec1 Indirect2 H 20 F XmtDat o 21 Logic Status ec 1 Data a8 Se el e Drive to Drive Xmit Data 2 O Vel Feedback Rec 1 Data 2 ET Rec 2 Data 1 Communications 2 F Rec l Data 1 RIO ChB Lgc Cmd 101 Ka Rec 2 Data 2 23 f Rec 1 Data 2 Ext Vel Ref M Rec 2 Data 1 of LogicCommand 25 f Rec 2 Data 2 g Logic Status Bd Function block a application 1336 FORCE Drive with PLC Communications Adapter Board 322 A RIOA IN 0 p r Roh Lge Cd 33 A RIOAIN P i Ext Vel Ref 38 A RIOA OUT o Logic Status 357 A RIOA OUT I Vel Feedback a gt a ow 1 4 Rack Mod Group 0 Function blocks Addr 1
288. uation The available operators Minimum Value 1 are Maximum Value 8 Value Description File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 1 Greater Than GT 2 Less Than GLT 3 Equals LEQ 4 ot Equals NE 5 Logical AND AND 6 Logical NAND NAND 7 Logical OR LOR 8 Logical NOR NOR 478 Trend 3 Sample Rate Parameter Number 418 Tr3 Sample Rate Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units Seconds Tr3 Sample Rate specifies the interval atwhich the Factory Default 0 020 Seconds data in the Trend In 3 parameter is sampled It is Minimum Value 0 002 Seconds programmable in 2 millisecond increments All Maximum Value 30 Seconds File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 479 Trend 3 Post Samples Tr3 Post Samples Tr3 Post Samples specifies the number of data samples to be gathered once the trigger evaluation becomes true There is always a sample reserved for the instance when the trigger condition becomes true Parameter Number 479 Parameter Type Read Write Non Linkable Sink Display Units Drive Units None Factory Default 15 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 499 File Group Diagnostics Trend Setup 480 Trend 3 Continuous Trigger Tr3 Cont Trigger Tr3 Cont Trigger specifies the type of trend You can choose either 0 for one shot or 1 for continuous With a one shot trend once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken are gathered the trend s
289. uch as scanning two 1 4 racks PLC Communicati Adapter Board i Scanner Mode 3 21 You can set either channel A channel B or both channels for RIO scanner mode However if you set both channels for RIO scanner you need to make sure that they are on separate blue hose cables as shown here RIO Adapter 1 4 rack RIO Adapter PLC Communications 1 2 rack Adapter Board with both channels configured for RIO scanner RIO Adapter 1 2 rack RIO Adapter 1 2 rack Important Block transfer is not supported on channels configured for RIO scanner When you are using a device such as a Bulletin 1201 Graphics Programming Terminal GPT if you look at the data from the PLC Communications Adapter Board you should be aware that the information for each rack within a channel is placed in word 0 For example if you have two 1 2 racks being scanned on one channel the low 1 2 rack will place data in parameters 351 through 354 and the high 1 2 rack can also place data in parameters 351 through 354 However from the PLC scanner side this information could be viewed in parameters 322 through 329 ons 351 Low 1 2 rack n 352 322 353 323 354 324 325 326 327 351 High 1 2 rack 328 352 329 353 354 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 3 22 The following is an example of a PLC Communications Adapter Board that is scanning an I O rack that is set up for 1 slot addressing When the Start button on the oper
290. uffer This function always returns 500 Example In this example a Maximum Trend Size Available request was sent 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to the drive The drive returned a value of 500 in word 3 8 9 sfe e T teem el EEL Data Format Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 58 Trend File Trend Command The Trend Command function allows you to send a disable trend enable trend or force trigger command to the drive for a specific trend operation PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data 4 words 3 words BTW instruction length BTR instruction length Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 4 PLC Decimal Value 28672 Drive Response Block Transfer Read Message Length 3 PLC Decimal Value 4096 Message OK 28672 Message Error Trend Number Message Operation Trend Number You can use the trend command to send one of the following commands to the drive disable trend enable trend or force trigger To send a Trend Command function you need to specify both the trend number and the command number The following are the valid trend numbers This number Specifies that the command is to be sent for 406 wend 8192 Trend 2 12228 Trend 3 16384 Trend 4 The following are the valid command numbers This number Sends a command to 0 Disable the specified trend 1 Enable the specified trend 2 Publication 1336 FORCE
291. umber of parameter values that are transferred Each parameter number followed by its value is listed in the message beginning with Word 4 The values are entered in drive units The BTR response N10 90 returns the status of each parameter write Note that a value of 600 was sent to parameter 392 words N10 7 and N10 8 Word N10 91 indicates the block transfer operation was not completely successful If all parameter values had been successfully transferred N10 91 would contain the value 3 Word N10 97 contains a negative value indicating the error occurred with parameter 392 Word N10 98 contains the status code indicating the parameter value is out of range Data Format BTW 6 ebb ESET N10 20 10 10 2 12 5 BTR These values vary depending on parameters and products Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 7 18 Fault Queue The Fault Clear Reset message activates one of several fault queue Fault Clear Reset related functions shown in the message request PLC Block Transfer Instruction Data BTW instruction length 4 words BTR instruction length 4 words Message Structure PLC Request Block Transfer Write Message Length 4 PLC Decimal Value 30976 Drive Response Block Transfer Read PLC Decimal Value 1792 Message OK 30976 Message Error Header Word 1 Header Word 2 Header Word 3 Fault Command Message Request Value EE Command Status Word Data Word 4
292. utor Read this document Document number 1336 FORCE PLC Communications Adapter Function Block Programming 1336 FORCE 5 9 Manual Information to help you install program start up 1336 FORCE Field Oriented 1336 FORCE 5 12 and maintain the 1336 FORCE digital ac drive Control User Manual In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley programmable controllers Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring 1770 4 1 Guidelines PLC 5 Family Programmable A description on how to install a PLC 5 system Controllers Hardware Installation 1785 6 6 1 Manual A description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices Application Considerations for Solid State Controls SGI 1 1 An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA National Electrical Code A complete listing of current Allen Bradley documentation including ordering instructions Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 A glossary of industrial automation terms and Allen Bradley Industrial Automation abbreviations AG 7 1 Glossary Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 P 4 Terms and Abbreviations This term BRAM
293. vent accidental linking and unpredictal Block Transfer behavior Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 360 Channel B Remote I O Output 1 Parameter Number _ 3600 ChB RIOA Out 1 adapter mode ees Type Read Write Sink ChB RIOS Out 1 scanner mode ite rea a ae ae ChB RIOx Out 1 contains the second word or data Minimum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The Maximum Value N 32767 data is transferred to the PLC controller every rack File Group Communications 1 0 Channel B scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can This parameter is not available if you set up channel B for DH Availability also provide this value directly Other drive functions can depends on the selected rack size provide this value through a configuration link Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 361 Channel B Remote I O Output 2 Parameter Number _ 3610 ChB RIOA Out 2 adapter mode ble Mae enn earl ChB RIOS Out 2 scanner mode Peas SS aaa us Factory Default None ChB RIOx Out2 contains the third word or data Minimum Value 32767 group to the PLC controller input image table The Maximum Value o 32767 data is transferred to the PLC controller every
294. wire the analog I O to the PLC Communications Adapter Board terminals 2 Set up the analog input and output configuration parameters in the drive 3 Create any user links if appropriate b gt Note The PLC Communications Adapter Board has been pre configured for your convenience The pre configured links are listed later in this chapter Each terminal has parameters associated with it as shown here in the analog I O block diagram TB21 Analog Out 1 ee pari Seale a I Analog Out 1 COMI 72 Par 400 Offse Analog Out 2 gur eaa Paras orale a 388 gt Analog Out 2 COM2 Par 402 Offse OUT3 Par 405 Scale Analog Out 3 Analog Out 3 com3 Fel Paraog ofset AT OUT4 Par 407 Scale Analog Out 4 Analog Out 4 coma Pay Par406 ofset C9 i N1 Par 393 Scale Analog In 1 E 33 Analog In 1 k N1 a Par 392 Offse ELE j N2 Par 395 Scale Analog In 2 30 Analog In 2 N2 12 Par 394 Offse a N3 Par 397 Scale Analog In 3 lt 34 Analog In 3 Na fT Par 396 Offset 2 gt i N4 Par 399 Scale Analog In 4 jl 322 Analog In 4 N4 16 Par 398 Offse E g 10V REF REF COM sd 10V REF Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 Use the set up parameters to program the PLC Communications Adapter Board functions The following p
295. ze Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 323 Channel A Remote I O Input 1 ChA RIOA In 1 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 1 scanner mode ChA RIOx In 1 contains the second word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive functions can use this value through a configuration link Parameter Number Parameter Type Display Units Drive Units Factory Default Minimum Value Maximum Value File Group 3230 Read Only Source None None 32767 432767 Communications 1 0 Channel A This parameter is not available if you set up channel A for DH Availability also depends on the selected rack size Note All eight words are displayed regardless of the rack size Only the number of words corresponding to the rack size and protocol with or without block transfer are functional 324 Channel A Remote I O Input 2 ChA RIOA In 2 adapter mode ChA RIOS In 2 scanner mode ChA RIOx In 2 contains the third word or data group from the PLC controller output image table The RIO scanner transfers the data to the drive every rack scan The PLC Communications Adapter Board can use this value directly Other drive
296. ze specify the channel position specify whether you are using redundant RIO select the RIO starting group set the RIO rack address Specifying the Rack Size Use the following chart to set switches 5 and 6 on either U2 or U4 to specify the rack size If your PLC communications Then By ond only requires select setning SWG SW5 to to 1 word of I O if block transfer is selected 1 4 off off 2 words of I O if block transfer is not selected rack 3 words of I O if block transfer is selected 1 2 Off On 4 words of I O if block transfer is not selected rack 5 words of I O if block transfer is selected 3 4 On off 6 words of I O if block transfer is not selected rack 7 words of I O if block transfer is selected Full On On 8 words of I O if block transfer is not selected rack Specifying the Last Not Last Group Scanned in Rack Use the following chart to set switch 7 on either U2 or U4 to specify whether this channel contains the highest module groups that will be scanned in this rack Does this channel contain the highest module groups Then set that will be scanned in this rack If SW7 to Yes On No Off Publication 1336 FORCE 5 13 September 1998 2 4 U2 or U4 Switch lt lt x QW OFF lt ON A le Redundant RIO SW8 Yes On No Off U3 and U5 Switches 1 or 2 OFF lt gt ON AS rE Starting Module Group swi swe 0 Off Off 2 Off On 4 On Off 6 On On Publication 1336 FO

1336 FORCE-5.13 -- September 1998

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents